Nextream - 4110-20

Head Office17, rue du Petit AlbiBP 8244 tel +33 1 34 20 70 0095801 Cergy Pontoise Cedex fax +33 1 34 20 70 47FRANCE http://www.nextream-online.com

DBE 4110 DSNG ENCODER(Release 7.0)MPEG-2/DVB Encoder

USER MANUAL47232437AK

This document and any updates and/or supplemental information, including any copies thereof, cannot be reproduced, neither communicated to a third party, without written authorisation fromNEXTREAM.

© 2003NEXTREAM

All rights reserved

BLANK PAGE

GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS iii

GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Please review the following safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage to this product or any products connected to it.CAUTION: These servicing instructions are for use by qualified personnel only. To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not perform any servicing other than that contained in the Operating Instructions unless you are qualified to do so. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.

Important Safety Precautions

Use Proper Power Cord Power cords are no longer shipped with the device.You are recommended to use the cord described onpage 55.

Avoid Electric Overload Do not apply a mains voltage that is outside therange specified in this manual.

Ground the Product This product is grounded through the power cord. To avoid electric shock, the ground pin must be correctly connected to the ground. Before switching the device on, ensure that it is properly grounded.

Do Not Operate WithoutCovers

To avoid electric shock or fire hazard, do notoperate this product with cover panels or platesremoved.

Use Proper Fuse For continued protection against risk of fire, replace only with same type and rating of fuse specified by NEXTREAM.

Do Not Operate inWet/Damp Conditions

To avoid electric shock, do not operate this productin wet or damp conditions.

47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

iv GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Do Not Operate inExplosive Atmosphere

To avoid injury or fire hazard, do not operate thisproduct in an explosive atmosphere.

Maintenance To avoid electric shock, disconnect the mains powersupply before carrying out any maintenanceoperations on the device.Maintenance should be carried out by qualifiedpersonnel.

Product Damage Precautions

Use Proper PowerSource

Do not operate this product from a power sourcethat applies more than the voltage specified.

Fitting If installing the device in a rack, observe the installation instructions in the section Rack installation page 53. Do not just secure the front panel of the device in the rack, instead use L-profiles as specified in the above-mentioned section.

Dusty atmosphere As the device features no air filter, it must be installed in a rack fitted with a filter if used in a dusty environment.This filter should be cleaned on a regular basis to avoid any overheating.

Provide ProperVentilation

Provide proper ventilation to prevent productoverheating.

Do Not Operate WithSuspected Failures

If you suspect there is damage to this product, haveit inspected by qualified service personnel.

Replacing components Only use components from or approved byNEXTREAM.

THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003

GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS v

Replacement of RAMwith in-built lithium

battery

This product includes a non volatile RAM with anin-built lithium battery which should never requirereplacing. If for any reason replacement does prove necessary,please observe the following conditions:. The operation must only be performed byqualified personnel.. Only replace with the same or equivalent memorytype.CAUTION! Danger of explosion if memory isincorrectly replaced.. Ensure the memory is inserted the right wayround.. Please dispose of dead memories according to themanufacturers instructions.

Retain OriginalPackaging

If equipment is returned to the Customer Service Department, the faulty device must be packed where possible in its original packaging (protective corners and boxes). If you no longer have the packaging, the faulty device must be protected against shocks during transportation.Our Customer Service Department examines packaging on arrival and can refuse to carry out repairs if the packaging has been visibly damaged during transportation and this has led to further damage in addition to the fault originally noted.Transportation costs and risks for equipment returns are borne by the Customer. Equipment should only be returned with a return authorisation form (provided at the end of this manual).


vi GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

BLANK PAGE


USING THE MANUAL vii

USING THE MANUAL

Chapter 1 "Specifications" provides technical specifications and detailedcharacteristics of the DBE 4110 DSNG Encoder.

Chapter 2 "Installation" explains the operations necessary on initial start up:equipment installation, connection, switching on, installation of "Stand-alone"supervision software for operation from a dedicated PC and installation of boards.

Chapter 3 "Front Panel Operation" presents the local supervision andconfiguration mode which gives the DSNG operator full control of signaltransmission and compression parameters.

Chapter 4 "PC operation - Control & Command software" gives a descriptionof the "Stand-alone" software.

Chapter 5 "PC operation - Fast_DSNG software" gives a description of the"Fast_DSNG" software especially designed for DSNG operators.

Chapter 6 "Troubleshooting" gives useful basic maintenance information whichwill assist with connection problems and mains fuse inspection.

Chapter 7 "Customer Service" contains important contact information shouldyou require the services of the NEXTREAM Customer Service.

Chapter 8 "Abbreviations and Acroynms" contains a list of the principalabbreviations and acronyms used in the manual along with their wording in full.


viii USING THE MANUAL

BLANK PAGE

THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003

CONTENTS ix

Contents

General Safety Instructions ................................................................................iii

Using the manual ................................................................................................vii

CHAPTER 1SPECIFICATIONS

1.1 - Encoding system overview .............................................................................. 3

1.2 - DBE 4110 overview............................................................................................ 4

1.3 - Sales references................................................................................................ 6

1.4 - Specifications .................................................................................................... 81.4.1 - Description of basic functions...................................................................... 8

1.4.1.1 - Video audio interface (SDI) .............................................................. 81.4.1.2 - De-embedded audio inputs .............................................................. 81.4.1.3 - Analogue audio inputs with 2 stereo audio ...................................... 91.4.1.4 - TS output ......................................................................................... 91.4.1.5 - Control and command interface..................................................... 101.4.1.6 - MPEG-2 4:2:0MP@ML .................................................................. 121.4.1.7 - Audio encoder ................................................................................ 131.4.1.8 - SI/PSI management ....................................................................... 141.4.1.9 - Low delay mode............................................................................. 141.4.1.10 - Private data.................................................................................. 151.4.1.11 - Stream Editing ............................................................................. 171.4.1.12 - VBI processing............................................................................. 181.4.1.13 - COMPIN board ............................................................................ 23

1.4.2 - Description of optional functions ............................................................... 251.4.2.1 - ASI TS input (option)...................................................................... 251.4.2.2 - DVB Common Scr. (option) ........................................................... 271.4.2.3 - MPEG-2 4:2:2P@ML (option) ........................................................ 281.4.2.4 - RS232 (option) ............................................................................... 291.4.2.5 - Ext. Modulator C&C (option) .......................................................... 301.4.2.6 - DPSN board (option)...................................................................... 311.4.2.7 - 4 stereo audios (option) ................................................................. 321.4.2.8 - 2 AES/EBU interfaces (option)....................................................... 34


x CONTENTS

1.4.2.9 - Int. modulator (option).................................................................... 351.4.2.10 - Alarm Relay Closure (option)....................................................... 361.4.2.11 - XLR adapter cord (option)............................................................ 371.4.2.12 - Source switching tolerance .......................................................... 37

1.4.3 - AC power supply ....................................................................................... 381.4.4 - Mechanical characteristics ........................................................................ 391.4.5 - Environmental specifications..................................................................... 421.4.6 - Equipment view......................................................................................... 45

CHAPTER 2INSTALLATION

2.1 - Encoder installation ........................................................................................ 502.1.1 - Manual switch setting................................................................................ 502.1.2 - Desktop installation ................................................................................... 532.1.3 - Rack installation ........................................................................................ 532.1.4 - Mains power supply and protective earth.................................................. 55

2.1.4.1 - Power supply ................................................................................. 552.1.4.2 - Connection to the techical earth .................................................... 562.1.4.3 - On/Off switch ................................................................................. 56

2.2 - Board connections.......................................................................................... 572.2.1 - SSEB board (slot 0)................................................................................... 582.2.2 - DPSN board (slot 1) .................................................................................. 652.2.3 - COMPIN board (slot 1).............................................................................. 662.2.4 - AMUSE board (slot 2) ............................................................................... 682.2.5 - ISMB board (slot 2) ................................................................................... 732.2.6 - ATADI board (slot 4).................................................................................. 752.2.7 - Alarm Relay Closure ................................................................................. 772.2.8 - Modulator Control&Command................................................................... 79

2.3 - Switching on the device ................................................................................. 80

2.4 - Cable corrector in the case of a composite input ........................................ 812.4.1 - DPSN board .............................................................................................. 812.4.2 - COMPIN board.......................................................................................... 82

2.5 - Installing Stand-Alone software..................................................................... 842.5.1 - Scope ........................................................................................................ 842.5.2 - Installation ................................................................................................. 84

2.5.2.1 - Environment................................................................................... 842.5.2.2 - Interface language for the applications .......................................... 85


CONTENTS xi

2.5.2.3 - Setup procedure ............................................................................ 852.5.3 - Running the software ................................................................................ 95

2.6 - Installing optional boards............................................................................... 972.6.1 - Installing a board ....................................................................................... 972.6.2 - Removing the board .................................................................................. 98

2.7 - Installing software options ............................................................................. 99

CHAPTER 3FRONT PANEL OPERATION

3.1 - Operating principle........................................................................................ 103

3.2 - Front panel overview..................................................................................... 104

3.3 - Welcome and main screens ......................................................................... 108

3.4 - Ergonomy....................................................................................................... 1103.4.1 - Operating mode....................................................................................... 1103.4.2 - Changing parameters ON AIR ................................................................ 112

3.5 - External modulator connection.................................................................... 113

3.6 - Menu tree........................................................................................................ 114

3.7 - Sections associated with the menu............................................................. 117

3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens...................................... 1183.8.1 - Main screen............................................................................................. 1183.8.2 - TRANSMIT screen .................................................................................. 1193.8.3 - PRESET screen ...................................................................................... 120

3.8.3.1 - PRESET / Recall screen.............................................................. 1203.8.3.2 - PRESET / Store screen ............................................................... 1223.8.3.3 - PRESET / Erase screen .............................................................. 123

3.8.4 - MOD.SETUP screen ............................................................................... 1243.8.4.1 - MOD.SETUP / Tx O/P screen...................................................... 1243.8.4.2 - MOD.SETUP / If screen............................................................... 1253.8.4.3 - MOD.SETUP / L-Band screen ..................................................... 1263.8.4.4 - MOD.SETUP / Convolution screen.............................................. 1273.8.4.5 - MOD.SETUP / Symbol_R screen ................................................ 1273.8.4.6 - MOD.SETUP / Info/Bandwidth screen ......................................... 1283.8.4.7 - MOD.SETUP / Roll_off screen..................................................... 1293.8.4.8 - MOD.SETUP / Spectrum screen ................................................. 130

3.8.5 - ENC.O/P screen...................................................................................... 130


xii CONTENTS

3.8.6 - ENCODING screen ................................................................................. 1313.8.6.1 - ENCODING / Video screen.......................................................... 1313.8.6.2 - ENCODING / Audio screen.......................................................... 1333.8.6.3 - ENCODING / Data screen ........................................................... 134

3.8.7 - SCRAMBLING screen............................................................................. 1353.8.8 - ALARM screen ........................................................................................ 1363.8.9 - OTHER screen........................................................................................ 137

3.8.9.1 - OTHER / Setup screen ................................................................ 1373.8.9.2 - OTHER / Monitor screen.............................................................. 138

3.8.9.2.1 - OTHER / Monitor / Output screen.................................. 1383.8.9.2.2 - OTHER / Monitor / Input screen .................................... 139

3.8.9.3 - OTHER / Tools screen................................................................. 1413.8.9.3.1 - OTHER / Tools / Control screen .................................... 1413.8.9.3.2 - OTHER / Tools / IP Address screen .............................. 1413.8.9.3.4 - OTHER / Tools / Reboot screen .................................... 1433.8.9.3.5 - OTHER / Tools / Option screen ..................................... 1433.8.9.3.6 - OTHER / Tools / About screen ...................................... 1463.8.9.3.7 - OTHER / Tools / Time screen........................................ 148

CHAPTER 4PC OPERATION - CONTROL & COMMAND SOFTWARE

4.1 - Ergonomic aspects ....................................................................................... 1554.1.1 - Screen..................................................................................................... 1554.1.2 - Mouse...................................................................................................... 1594.1.3 - Setting the interface language................................................................. 1604.1.4 - On-line manuals ...................................................................................... 1624.1.5 - Simulator mode ....................................................................................... 163

4.1.5.1 - Activation of simulator mode........................................................ 1634.1.5.2 - Simulation of options.................................................................... 164

4.1.6 - Device locking/unlocking ......................................................................... 165

4.2 - Running software .......................................................................................... 168

4.3 - Equipment Interface application ............................................................... 170

4.4 - Equipment Installation application ........................................................... 1734.4.1 - Purpose and scope of the application ..................................................... 1734.4.2 - Screen layout .......................................................................................... 1744.4.3 - Declaring the device................................................................................ 1754.4.4 - Cancelling/validating device installation changes ................................... 179

4.4.4.1 - Cancelling changes to device installation .................................... 179


CONTENTS xiii

4.4.4.2 - Validating changes to device installation ..................................... 1804.4.5 - Additional device installation commands................................................. 181

4.4.5.1 - Remove a device ......................................................................... 1814.4.5.2 - Change device name and address .............................................. 181

4.5 - Technical Configuration application......................................................... 1844.5.1 - Purpose and scope of the application ..................................................... 1844.5.2 - Screen layout .......................................................................................... 1864.5.3 - Device parameters .................................................................................. 189

4.5.3.1 - Encoder operating parameters (advanced parameters) .............. 1894.5.3.1.1 - General item................................................................ 1924.5.3.1.2 - Output item.................................................................. 1944.5.3.1.3 - Encoders item.............................................................. 1964.5.3.1.4 - Data injection item....................................................... 1994.5.3.1.5 - Scrambler item ............................................................ 2004.5.3.1.6 - SAM card item............................................................. 2014.5.3.1.7 - Access control item ..................................................... 2024.5.3.1.8 - SIMS item.................................................................... 2034.5.3.1.9 - Time item..................................................................... 2044.5.3.1.10 - TBS Signalling item ................................................... 2064.5.3.1.11 - ISO Signalling item.................................................... 2084.5.3.1.12 - DVB Signalling item................................................... 2094.5.3.1.13 - PSIP Signalling item.................................................. 211

4.5.3.2 - Modulator parameters .................................................................. 2124.5.3.3 - NIT table ...................................................................................... 215

4.5.3.3.1 - Edit the NIT.................................................................... 2154.5.3.3.2 - Changing descriptors ..................................................... 2194.5.3.3.3 - Deleting descriptors ....................................................... 2194.5.3.3.4 - Saving/Loading a NIT .................................................... 220

4.5.3.4 - TOT table ..................................................................................... 2234.5.3.4.1 - Edit the TOT................................................................... 2234.5.3.4.2 - Changing descriptors ..................................................... 2274.5.3.4.3 - Deleting descriptors ....................................................... 227

4.5.3.5 - Saving/Loading a device configuration ........................................ 2284.5.3.6 - Archived configurations................................................................ 2304.5.3.7 - Cancelling/Validating changes..................................................... 2354.5.3.8 - Device locking / unlocking............................................................ 237

4.5.4 - Generated Services................................................................................. 2384.5.4.1 - TV service .................................................................................... 239

4.5.4.1.1 - Editing parameters of the video component .................. 2434.5.4.1.2 - Editing parameters of the audio component .................. 2554.5.4.1.3 - Editing parameters of the VBI component ..................... 2644.5.4.1.4 - Editing parameters of the data component .................... 2714.5.4.1.5 - PMT descriptors............................................................. 283


xiv CONTENTS

4.5.4.1.6 - SDT descriptors ............................................................. 2894.5.4.2 - Advanced Functions .................................................................... 290

4.5.4.2.1 - Shared components....................................................... 2904.5.4.2.2 - Ghost components......................................................... 2914.5.4.2.3 - Inband command ........................................................... 293

4.5.5 - TS input ................................................................................................... 2934.5.5.1 - First level filtering: stopping/passing the TS input........................ 2984.5.5.2 - Second level filtering: filtering conditions on the tributary,

selecting services and EMM flows ................................................ 2984.5.5.2.1 - General filtering conditions on the tributary ................... 2984.5.5.2.2 - Selection of services...................................................... 3034.5.5.2.3 - Selection of EMM flows ................................................. 306

4.5.5.3 - Third level filtering: filtering conditions on services...................... 3094.5.5.3.1 - General filtering conditions ............................................ 3094.5.5.3.2 - Individual filtering of components .................................. 3124.5.5.3.3 - Attaching components ................................................... 3164.5.5.3.4 - Removing a service ....................................................... 321

4.5.5.4 - Fourth level filtering: filtering conditions on components ............. 3224.5.5.4.1 - General filtering conditions ............................................ 3224.5.5.4.2 - Removing a component ................................................. 324

4.6 - Monitoring & Redundancy application.................................................... 3264.6.1 - Purpose and scope of the application ..................................................... 3264.6.2 - Screen layout .......................................................................................... 3274.6.3 - Alarm supervision.................................................................................... 334

4.6.3.1 - Alarms window............................................................................. 3344.6.3.2 - Equipment window....................................................................... 338

4.6.4 - Supervision of services and data flow..................................................... 3404.6.5 - Save all/Load all commands ................................................................... 3434.6.6 - Maintenance commands ......................................................................... 3444.6.7 - Audible warning of alarms ....................................................................... 350

4.7 - Download application ............................................................................... 3514.7.1 - Purpose and scope of the application ..................................................... 3514.7.2 - Screen layout .......................................................................................... 3514.7.3 - Procedure................................................................................................ 353

4.7.3.1 - Before downloading ..................................................................... 3534.7.3.2 - Downloading ................................................................................ 3584.7.3.3 - After downloading ........................................................................ 359

4.7.4 - Additional commands.............................................................................. 360

4.8 - Event Log application ............................................................................... 3624.8.1 - Principles of the Event Log application ................................................. 362

4.8.1.1 - Event............................................................................................ 362


CONTENTS xv

4.8.1.2 - View configuration functions ........................................................ 3634.8.1.3 - Event exporting ............................................................................ 3634.8.1.4 - Miscellaneous .............................................................................. 364

4.8.2 - Screen layout .......................................................................................... 3644.8.3 - Commands .............................................................................................. 368

4.8.3.1 - Commands for opening an event log file ..................................... 3684.8.3.2 - Command for exporting in text format.......................................... 3694.8.3.3 - Display commands....................................................................... 3714.8.3.4 - Calculation commands................................................................. 376

4.9 - Alarm Help application............................................................................... 3794.9.1 - Scope ...................................................................................................... 3794.9.2 - Features .................................................................................................. 379

4.9.2.1 - Extended description of alarms.................................................... 3794.9.2.2 - Print capability.............................................................................. 3804.9.2.3 - Search engine.............................................................................. 3804.9.2.4 - Navigation tool ............................................................................. 3804.9.2.5 - Synchronisation with the Monitoring & Redundancy

and Event Log applications.......................................................... 3804.9.2.6 - Synchronisation with other applications....................................... 3804.9.2.7 - User defined comments ............................................................... 3804.9.2.8 - French/English versions............................................................... 3814.9.2.9 - Customisation of display .............................................................. 3814.9.2.10 - Summary of alarms.................................................................... 3814.9.2.11 - Help / About ............................................................................... 381

4.9.3 - Access to the Alarm help application .................................................... 3824.9.3.1 - Access via the Monitoring &Redundancy application ................ 3824.9.3.2 - Access via the Event Log application ........................................ 3824.9.3.3 - Access via any application........................................................... 383

4.9.4 - User Interface (main window and commands) ........................................ 384

4.10 - Commands available with the Telnet application..................................... 3904.10.1 - Using the Telnet application .................................................................. 3904.10.2 - IP Settings ............................................................................................. 3964.10.3 - Parameter definitions ............................................................................ 397

4.10.3.1 - Video bidir .................................................................................. 3974.10.3.2 - Audio stream type ...................................................................... 3974.10.3.3 - LTW_offset................................................................................. 3984.10.3.4 - SPE (SuperEncoder) switch source mode................................. 3984.10.3.5 - VBI stream type ......................................................................... 3984.10.3.6 - LDSChurch mode ...................................................................... 3984.10.3.7 - ABSAT mode ............................................................................. 3994.10.3.8 - Multichoice-D1 mode ................................................................. 3994.10.3.9 - Foxtel 6dB uplift ......................................................................... 400


xvi CONTENTS

4.10.3.10 - Closed Caption type................................................................. 4014.10.3.11 - Extended-data insertion (line 284) ........................................... 401

CHAPTER 5PC OPERATION - FAST_DSNG SOFTWARE

5.1 - Fast-DSNG ..................................................................................................... 405

5.2 - Software presentation................................................................................... 407

5.3 - Interfaces ....................................................................................................... 4105.3.1 - Encoder interface .................................................................................... 4105.3.2 - Modulator/up-converter interface ............................................................ 4105.3.3 - Graphic interface..................................................................................... 410

5.4 - Functions ....................................................................................................... 4115.4.1 - Modulator configuration........................................................................... 4115.4.2 - Encoder configuration ............................................................................. 4115.4.3 - Supervision.............................................................................................. 411

5.5 - Operation ....................................................................................................... 4135.5.1 - General principles ................................................................................... 4135.5.2 - Setup panel ............................................................................................. 4145.5.3 - Transmission panel ................................................................................. 416

5.5.3.1 - Transmission parameters ............................................................ 4175.5.3.2 - Parameters linked to encoder control and signal content ............ 419

5.5.4 - Alarms panel ........................................................................................... 4265.5.5 - Scrambling panel..................................................................................... 4275.5.6 - Information panel..................................................................................... 4295.5.7 - Preset panel ............................................................................................ 4305.5.8 - Dynamic behaviour.................................................................................. 432

5.5.8.1 - No connection .............................................................................. 4325.5.8.2 - Setting up a connection ............................................................... 432

CHAPTER 6TROUBLESHOOTING

6.1 - Device connection problems ....................................................................... 436

6.2 - Inspecting the power supply fuse ............................................................... 437

6.3 - Miscellaneous problems............................................................................... 438


CONTENTS xvii

6.3.1 - Fan life expectancy ................................................................................. 4386.3.2 - Front panel LCD blank ............................................................................ 4386.3.3 - Default analogue video input................................................................... 4386.3.4 - Autotest problem ..................................................................................... 4386.3.5 - Recommendations when using the MSU 4440 decoder ......................... 439

CHAPTER 7CUSTOMER SERVICE

7.1 - EU Declaration of conformity ....................................................................... 443

7.2 - FCC Declaration of conformity..................................................................... 444

7.3 - Return your comments ................................................................................. 445

7.4 - NEXTREAM Customer Services................................................................... 446

CHAPTER 8ABBREVIATIONS AND ACROYNMS

Abbreviations and acronyms .............................................................................. 451


xviii CONTENTS


Chapter 1 - Specifications 1

Chapter 1Specifications

1.1 - Encoding system overview ................................................................... 3

1.2 - DBE 4110 overview ................................................................................ 4

1.3 - Sales references..................................................................................... 6

1.4 - Specifications ......................................................................................... 81.4.1 - Description of basic functions ........................................................... 8

1.4.1.1 - Video audio interface (SDI) .............................................................. 81.4.1.2 - De-embedded audio inputs .............................................................. 81.4.1.3 - Analogue audio inputs with 2 stereo audio ...................................... 91.4.1.4 - TS output ......................................................................................... 91.4.1.5 - Control and command interface..................................................... 101.4.1.6 - MPEG-2 4:2:0MP@ML .................................................................. 121.4.1.7 - Audio encoder ................................................................................ 131.4.1.8 - SI/PSI management ....................................................................... 141.4.1.9 - Low delay mode............................................................................. 141.4.1.10 - Private data.................................................................................. 151.4.1.11 - Stream Editing ............................................................................. 171.4.1.12 - VBI processing............................................................................. 181.4.1.13 - COMPIN board ............................................................................ 23

1.4.2 - Description of optional functions..................................................... 251.4.2.1 - ASI TS input (option)...................................................................... 251.4.2.2 - DVB Common Scr. (option) ........................................................... 271.4.2.3 - MPEG-2 4:2:2P@ML (option) ........................................................ 281.4.2.4 - RS232 (option) ............................................................................... 291.4.2.5 - Ext. Modulator C&C (option) .......................................................... 301.4.2.6 - DPSN board (option)...................................................................... 311.4.2.7 - 4 stereo audios (option) ................................................................. 321.4.2.8 - 2 AES/EBU interfaces (option)....................................................... 341.4.2.9 - Int. modulator (option) .................................................................... 351.4.2.10 - Alarm Relay Closure (option) ....................................................... 361.4.2.11 - XLR adapter cord (option)............................................................ 371.4.2.12 - Source switching tolerance .......................................................... 37

1.4.3 - AC power supply............................................................................. 38


2 Chapter 1 - Specifications

1.4.4 - Mechanical characteristics ............................................................. 391.4.5 - Environmental specifications.......................................................... 421.4.6 - Equipment view .............................................................................. 45


Chapter 1 3 1.1 - Encoding system overview

1.1 - ENCODING SYSTEM OVERVIEW

The DBE 4110 DSNG encoder has been designed to meet the main operationalDigital SNG requirements: robustness, reduced size (2RU) and weight, easy to useand to set up, high quality video and audio, low delay and ultra low delay modes forlive interviews.

Figure 1.1: DBE 4110 system overview

video,audio,

dataEncoderDBE 4110

TS

ModulatorC&C


4 Chapter 1 1.2 - DBE 4110 overview

1.2 - DBE 4110 OVERVIEW

The DBE 4110 is a compact MPEG-2-standard encoding (or compression) deviceoffering both MP@ML and 4:2:2P@ML standard. The use of the 4:2:2 Profileallows compression rates of up to 50Mbit/s without prior sub-sampling and ensuresa high quality compression. Performance and cost-effectiveness are achievedthrough the THOMSON second generation chipset which offers five-levelhierarchical motion estimation, far-ranging motion vector calculations and two-passrate control for improved bit-rate allocation.

The DBE 4110 single-service encoder performs encoding from a composite sourceor SDI with or without embedded audio. A maximum of 6 separate audio inputs areavailable.

The DBE 4110 ensures interoperability with DVB-standard equipment. A fullyDVB-compliant transport stream composed of video, audios, data as well as SI/PSIinformation is delivered directly in DVB-ASI format.

Furthermore the DBE 4110 is fully compliant with the scrambling features definedby EBU (namely mode 1), for exchanging scrambled MPEG-2 streams.

The DBE 4110 can be controlled through its front panel to facilitate basic operation.

The DBE 4110 is provided with two Control&Command software programs,running on Windows NTTM based PC station using an Ethernet 10 baseT interface:

Fast_DSNG software for easy and intuitive operation, specially designed forDSNG operators,

Stand-Alone Control&Command software for advanced operation.

This document refers to release 7.0 of the DBE 4110.

Figure 1.2 gives an overview of the DBE 4110.


Chapter 1 5 1.2 - DBE 4110 overview

Figure 1.2: DBE 4110 overall block diagram

Scrambler

MUX

4 x MPEG-1AudioEncoders

DataInterface

MPEG-2VideoEncoder

SDIVideoAudioInterface

PAL/ SECAM/ 4:2:2 //

ASIInterface

2 x MPEG-1

Encoders

VBIProcessor

TS IN ASI

SDI IN

TSComposite

Video Interface

2 stereoanal. audios ADC

ASIInterface

Basic

Hardwareor Softwareoption

AlarmsLCD

Control/Command

NTSC

RS 232

Audio

ATADI2 AES/EBU

SDI and AES/EBU

DPSN board

board

AMuSE board

MSDLboard

Alarm relay

Alarms

ModulatedoutputISMB board

PAL/ NTSC

4:2:2 //COMPIN board


6 Chapter 1 1.3 - Sales references

1.3 - SALES REFERENCES

DBE 4110 DSNG encoder (with deactivated DVB-CS scrambler: N4110220AK,or without scrambling capability: N4110220BK), including:

Basic audio/video encoder, COMPIN board, Low Delay Mode, VBI Processing, 100 to 230 VAC power supply,

∗ Software options:

ASI TS input (N41STS1NAK), DVB Common Scr. (N41SDVCFAK), MPEG-2 4:2:2P@ML (N41S422PAK), RS 232 (N41SD56KAK), Ext. Modulator C&C (N41SM0DCAK).

Important: All software options are purchased for, and attributed to, a given DBE 4110unit and may not apply to several units. Each software option is attributed a licencenumber which is requested prior to use.

∗ Hardware options:

4 stereo audios (N41HAMUBAK): AMuSE board, 2 AES/EBU interfaces (N41HATADAK): ATADI board, Alarm Relay Closure (N41HMSDLAK): RSMAINT and MSDL boards, DPSN board (N41HDPSNAK), Int. Modulator (N41HM0DUAK): ISMB board, XLR adapter cord (N41HAXLRAK).


Chapter 1 7 1.3 - Sales references

Board connections

Figure 1.3: DBE 4110 rear panel

COMPIN (basic) or DPSN (option)

SSEB (basic)

AMuSE (option) or ISMB (option)

ATADI (option)

MSDL (option)


8 Chapter 1 1.4 - Specifications

1.4 - SPECIFICATIONS

1.4.1 - Description of basic functions

1.4.1.1 - Video audio interface (SDI)

The SMPTE 259M standard SDI input uses a female 75Ω BNC connector. Itaccepts a 270Mbit/s component 625 or 525 line serial stream. It operates with a 0-200m length cable (type RG11A/V Filotex or 8281 Belden).

1.4.1.2 - De-embedded audio inputs

Audio de-embedding is SMPTE 272MA-compliant.

Audio de-embedding is possible when:

the video encoder uses the SDI input, the video encoder is not used and there is a signal at the SDI input,

and is not possible when the video encoder uses the composite video input.

The 270Mbit/s signal can contain up to 8 stereo audios. The DBE 4110 can de-embed 2 stereo audios which are either:

stereos 1 and 2 (DID = 2FF), or stereos 3 and 4 (DID = 1FD), or stereos 5 and 6 (DID = 1FB), or stereos 7 and 8 (DID = 2F9).

Characteristics:

synchronous 48kHz 20 bits audio, de-embedding of 2 stereo audio channels, C, U and V bits are ignored, no pre-emphasis or de-emphasis.


Chapter 1 9 1.4 - Specifications

1.4.1.3 - Analogue audio inputs with 2 stereo audio

1.4.1.4 - TS output

The SSEB board delivers three identical ASI standard TS outputs on a female 75ΩBNC connector. The ASI output runs at a constant 270Mbit/s. The TS data rate is

CHARACTERISTICS Input impedance set to 600Ω for all measurements. Input level adjustment set to 24dBu for all measurements. All measurements are performed with MPEG-1 compression, layer 2, 256kbit/s stereobitrate.

Input type Balanced

Input impedance 600Ω +/− 5% or high impedance (typ.18kΩ)

Input level adjustment 0dBFS = +8 to +24dBu (in steps of 1dB)

Common mode rejection ratio > 60dB from 20Hz to 20kHz

Bandwidth(measured with a sinus sweep)

20Hz to 20kHz, (+/- 0.3dB)Vin = 23.5dBu

Insertion gain +/- 0.3dBVin = 23.5dBu, 1kHz

Total harmonic distortion + noise <0.01% (ADC only) at 1kHz<0.1% (ADC + MPEG-1 compression)RMS measurement, from 20Hz to 20kHzVin = 23.5dBu

Signal to noise ratio ≥ 85dBVin = 23.5dBu at 1kHzRMS measurement, from 20Hz to 20kHz, unweighted

Crosstalk between any two mono chan-nels

≥ 80dBV(in) = 23.5dBu, 1kHz

ADC resolution / sampling frequency 18 bits / 48kHz

Emphasis no pre-emphasis or de-emphasis



supplemented with stuffing bytes to reach 270Mbit/s. Data burst mode isimplemented (individual bytes spread out in time).

The minimum TS data rate is 1Mbit/s and the maximum TS data rate is 54Mbit/s.TS packet length is 188 or 204 bytes. In 204-byte mode, the last 16 bytes are set tothe value zero and are meant to be replaced by an error correction code (ReedSolomon) in a downstream modulator.

1.4.1.5 - Control and command interface

The DBE 4110 encoder can be operated either locally (front panel control) or byremote control (using Control&Command software running on Windows NT basedPC station) using an Ethernet 10 baseT interface.

Two Control&Command software programs are provided:

Fast_DSNG software for easy and intuitive operation, specially designed forDSNG operators. Its main window is shown in the figure below,

Stand-Alone Control&Command software for advanced operation.

Attention : Some functions are not controlled by all the interfaces.

CHARACTERISTICS

Standard CENELEC: EN50083-9

Mode Data burst

Signal amplitude 800mV ± 10%

Rise / fall time ≤ 1.2ns

Random jitter (using D21.5 signal) ≤ ± 4%

CHARACTERISTICS

Standard IEEE 802.3 - 10 Base T

Connector type RJ45 connector

Protocol TCP - IP based protocol



The recommended configuration of the PC supporting the stand-alone software is asfollows:

300 MHz Pentium II microprocessor, 64Mb RAM, 1.2Gb Hard drive, WINDOWS NT version 4 or WINDOWS 2000 software, ETHERNET board (e.g. Compaq Integrated Netelligent 10/100 TX PQ

Network Adapter), TCP/IP command interface (Microsoft TCP/IP-32), Screen 17 ", resolution SVGA (800x600), colour, Mouse.

The DBS 2930 Stand-Alone software provided can only control one encoder. Tocontrol a complete broadcast system, please refer to the DBS 2930 datasheet fordetails.



1.4.1.6 - MPEG-2 4:2:0MP@ML

Video encoding complies with MPEG-2 standard ISO/IEC 13818-2.

CHARACTERISTICS

Video source 50/60Hz frequencya

Interlaced /progressive 4:2:2 video 10 bits

Encoding format 2:1 vertical filtering (chrominance) 720, 704, 544, 480, 352 pixels 576 lines (50Hz) or 480 lines (60Hz) SIF mode (352 pixels, 288 lines (50 Hz) or 240 lines (60Hz))

GOP parameters 1 ≤ M ≤ 3 M ≤ N ≤ 24 Possibility of closed GOP Frame picture with adaptive field/frame encoding modes (motion estimation and DCT) Seamless M and N parameter changing

Aspect ratio Manual 4/3, 16/9, Automatic from WSS information or AFD information.

Motion estimation vector range (frame based)

+126/-126 Vertical+254.5/-255 Horizontal

Bit rate VBV model implementation Bit rate type: CBR Bit rate parameters:

100kbit/s steps0.5Mbit/s ≤ bit rate ≤ 15Mbit/s

SIF at 500kbit/s(bitrates between 500Kbit/s and 2Mbit/s are reserved for almost still pictures, depending on encoding resolution and picturecomplexity) Seamless bit rate change

Video buffer management Leak mode

Miscellaneous functions Detection of scene cuts, 3/2 pull down, bad edit Capture and transmission of Digital Vertical Time Code (into GOP header). 75% bar pattern insertion



1.4.1.7 - Audio encoder

The SSEB board features 2 MPEG-1 audio encoders in accordance with ISO/IEC11172-3, layer 2, 48kHz standard.

For each audio encoder, possible rate / mode combinations are listed in the tablebelow:

The audio encoding module performs automatic audio/video compensation delay.

The audio encoding module has audio pattern generation capability (2.1kHz 0dBFSsignal).

Input selection between analogue audio, de-embedded audio and AES/EBU audio(N41HATADAK option) is separate for the 2 MPEG-1 audio encoders. Selection issupervision-controlled.

Mono, stereo or dual-channel can be selected either manually, or automaticallyfrom VPS information when present in the video source.

All command running is seamless apart from audio/video compensation delaymodification, analogue input level adjustment and changing between one and twoPIDs.

Each MPEG-1 dual channel encoder can be configured in such a way that it isconveyed as a single PID or as two distinct PIDs. In this case the audio encodergenerates two single channel elementary streams, both having the same

Normal delay Delay from SDI encoder input to PTS value (+/- 5ms): 740ms (50Hz), 617ms (60Hz), guaranteed delay from 1.5 to 15Mbit/s.

a.Throughout the document, the value 60Hz in relation to video signal implies a real value of59.94Hz

Rate (kbit/s)Mode

64 96 128 192 256 384

Single Channel (Mono) X X X X

Dual Channel X X X X

Stereo X X X X

Joint Stereo X X X X

CHARACTERISTICS



configuration except for the PID and the language code (both components will havethe same bitrate, etc.).

When there is no video component, the MPEG-1 encoder is in radio mode and thedelay (from SDI encoder input to PTS value, +/- 5ms) becomes equal to 150ms(50Hz and 60Hz).

1.4.1.8 - SI/PSI management

The DBE 4110 has three operating modes for signalling generation:

no signalling generated, generation of ISO tables (PAT, CAT, PMT, TSDT), generation of DVB tables (ISO tables + SDT, TDT, TOT, BAT, NIT).

The operating mode is selected by the operator.

The DBE 4110 regularly broadcasts signalling information according to repetitionrates that can be set up from the Control & Command station (remote control).

Tables required for DVB DSNG operation are automatically generated according totransmitted signal configuration.

1.4.1.9 - Low delay mode

Two trade offs between delay and video compression quality are now available:

Low delay mode

4:2:0MP@ML MPEG-2 video Delay from SDI encoder input to PTS value (+/- 5ms): 320ms (50Hz), 267ms (60Hz),guaranteed delay from 4 to 15Mbit/s. I and P pictures, no B picture.

4:2:2P@ML MPEG-2 video Delay from SDI encoder input to PTS value (+/- 5ms): 280ms (50Hz), 233ms (60Hz), guaranteed delay from 6 to 50Mbit/s. I and P pictures, no B picture.



SIF mode is not available in ultra low delay mode.

Use of MSU 4422 decoder adds approximately 70 ms to each delay.

Switching between normal and low delay or ultra low delay is not seamless (pictureis disturbed for 2 or 3 seconds).

Bitrates below 4Mbit/s in low delay / 4:2:0 mode, and bitrates below 6Mbit/s in lowdelay / 4:2:2 mode and ultra low delay mode are reserved for almost still pictures,depending on encoding resolution and picture complexity.

1.4.1.10 - Private data

The possibility of entering private data via Ethernet, as TS packets or sections, isincluded in the basic version of the DBE 4110 (List of supported protocols in thesecond table below).

When data is injected as MPEG-2 TS packets, the DBE 4110 may perform PIDremapping. The TS packets received are not supposed to contain a PCR or a PTS.

When data is injected as DVB sections, the DBE 4110 performs packetisation.

Ultra low delay mode

4:2:0MP@ML MPEG-2 video Delay from SDI encoder input to PTS value (+/- 5ms): 140ms (50Hz), 134ms (60Hz), guaranteed delay from 6 to 15Mbit/s. I pictures, no P and B pictures.

4:2:2P@ML MPEG-2 video Delay from SDI encoder input to PTS value (+/- 5ms): 100ms (50Hz), 100ms (60Hz), guaranteed delay from 6 to 50Mbit/s. I pictures, no P and B pictures.

CHARACTERISTICS

Standard IEEE 802.3 - 10 Base T

Connector type RJ45 connector

Protocol TCP - IP based protocol



Maximum data rate depends on Ethernet network traffic. When the Ethernetnetwork is not a limiting factor, the guaranteed maximum data rate depends oninternal conditions; it is never under 64kbit/s and can go up to 750kbit/s when thefollowing conditions are met:

TS input unused, 1 service composed of:

- 0 or 1 video component, - and 0 or 1 audio component,- and 0 to 4 ECM components.

The maximum permitted data rate parameter is set at 1 Mbit/s.



1.4.1.11 - Stream Editing

In order to obtain an editable MPEG stream between two time code values, theDBE 4110 encoder can insert an I picture and create a closed GOP when theincoming DVITC reaches a predefined value. The DBE 4110 automatically choosesthe DVITC if it is on lines 19 and 332 (50Hz) or lines 11 and 274 (60Hz). If theDVITC is on other lines, the user must specify the lines using the DBS 2930Control&Command software.

The predefined value is sent to the DBE 4110 via MTEP / TCP/IP protocol(available on request). This value must be sent in advance with reference to thecurrent time code value. The DBE 4110 can store up to 32 preset values. About thislimit the new values are ignored.

Notes:- Stream Editing does not operate with the VITC.- Stream Editing does not operate in 60Hz drop frame mode.

7.0 release protocols Title

THOMSON proprietary protocol

MPEG1 1G/2G Control/Command protocolMessages description

VIACCESSproprietary protocol V1.0

Dossier de spécifications fonctionnelles détailléesDiffuseur de Messagerieréf. R/PACMAN/DM/SPE01

TCP DVB simulcrypt ETSI TS 103 197Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB)Head-End Implementation of DVB simulcrypt

ETSI TS 101 197-1Technical specification of Simulcrypt in DVB sys-tems (06/97)

UDP DVB simulcrypt with TCP control layer

ETSI TS 103 197Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB)Head-End Implementation of DVB simulcrypt

UDP DVB simulcrypt without TCP control layer

ETSI TS 103 197Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB)Head-End Implementation of DVB simulcrypt



- Stream Editing does not operate with the video in 4:2:2:P.- Stream Editing does not operate in low or ultra low delay mode.

The video buffer level is controlled so as to be more constant at each edit point(close to the maximum level).

Please contact NEXTREAM for additional information if you are interested in thisfunction.

1.4.1.12 - VBI processing

This module is capable of processing ancillary data from either the SDI or the PALinput.

The following diagrams describe the different ways ancillary data can or cannot beprocessed:



Figure 1.4: Ancillary data processing

VBI

video

video + VBI

video + VBI

video

VBI

PAL

SDI

PAL

SDI

PAL

SDI

PAL

SDI

VBI

video + VBIPAL

SDI

1

2

3

4

5

Diagram

Diagram

Diagram

Diagram

Diagram



Diagram 1 shows a VBI inserter function. VBI information from thecomposite video signal is conveyed in the TS bitstream as described in DVBstandard. The composite video signal must be externally synchronised with theSDI video source.

Diagrams 2 and 3 illustrate a common setup. Diagram 4 shows a configuration similar to diagram 1 but which is not

supported. Diagram 5 illustrates the fact that the DBE 4110 cannot simultaneously

process VBI information coming from both video inputs.

The VBI processor capabilities are described in the following table.



Data Frequency Data standards Input Signal

Possible lines

(starting from 1)

Ceefax Bmagazine

and/or subtitles

50Hz ITU-R.BT653ETS 300 706

SDI or

Composite

waveform 6 to 22320 to 335

Transparent lines

50Hz SDI or

Composite

6 to 22318 to 335

VITC 50Hz IEC 60461SMPTE 12M

SDI or

Composite

waveform 6 to 22

DVITC 50Hz SMPTE 266M SDI waveform 6 to 22

WSS 50Hz ETS300 294 SDI or

Composite

waveform 23

WSS 50Hz Proprietary based on SMPTE 291M

SDI binary 23

VPS 50Hz ETS 300 231 SDI or

Composite

waveform 16

AFD 50Hz First part of viideo index

SMPTE RP186

SDI 11 and 324

Transparent lines

60Hz SDI or Composite

10 to 21273 to 284

VITC 60Hz IEC 60461SMPTE 12M

SDI or

Composite

waveform 10 to 21

DVITC 60Hz SMPTE 266M SDI waveform 10 to 21

Closed caption 60Hz EIA-608 SDI or

Composite

waveform 21



Data Max

treated lines

Treatment MPEG standards Notes

Ceefax Bmagazine

and/or subtitles

16 per field

demodulated then mapped into TS packets

ETSI EN 300 472DVB A056

ETSI EN 301 775

a

Transparent lines

8 per frame

luminance samples, 8 bits, 720 samples/line, mapped into TS packets

DVB A056ETSI EN 301 775

b

VITC 1 demodulated then mapped into GOP header

ISO/IEC 13818-2

DVITC 1 demodulated then mapped into GOP header

ISO/IEC 13818-2

WSS 1 demodulated then mapped into TS packets and/or used to inform the video encoder


WSS 1 binary WSS from DBI 2000 (AVA) is mapped into TS packets and/or used to inform the video encoders


c

VPS 1 demodulated, then mapped into TS packets and/or used to control the audio encoders


AFD 2 inserted into video stream ARDSPE124 april 1998

Transparent lines

8 per frame

luminance samples, 8 bits, 720 samples/line, mapped into TS packets

DVB A056ETSI EN 301 775 b

VITC 1 demodulated then mapped into GOP header

ISO/IEC 13818-2

DVITC 1 demodulated then mapped into GOP header

ISO/IEC 13818-2

Closed caption 1 demodulated then mapped into video user data

ATSC A/53



Notes 1. Data cannot be encoded simultaneously according to 50Hz and 60Hz MPEG-2standard.2. Each CEEFAX B, VPS, WSS can be mapped into its individual PID (max. 4 PID) or allthe previous can be mapped together into the same PID.3. The same VBI line cannot be associated with different PIDs.

1.4.1.13 - COMPIN board

The COMPIN board provides composite video input for the DBE 41xx encoders.

The COMPIN board fits in the upper 6U slot.

Note: the COMPIN board does not handle SECAM standard.

a.Since 6.5 release, CEEFAX extraction from the incoming video signal has been improved. The data positionning window has been widened to +/-1µs. Demodulation process benefits from an automaticthreshold level adjustment.b.Restrictions of DVB A056 concerning the MSU 4422 decoder.c.Not recommended for new systems.

INPUT CHARACTERISTICS

Standard PAL BDGHI / NTSC M(ITU-R Rec. 624)

Input impedance BNC / 75Ω

Input level (100% white bar) 1 volt peak-to-peak, nominal, with sync signal

ENCODER + DECODERCHARACTERISTICS

PAL STANDARD(excluding VTR and synchronised modes)

WITH MSU 4422 DECODER

Measurement conditions set A (video encoding)

4:2:2P, GOP 1/1, 50Mbit/s, 720 pixels

Measurement conditions set B (video encoding)

4:2:0MP@ML, GOP 12/3, 14Mbit/s,720 pixels



Note:COMPIN signal to noise ratio is measured in a different way in comparison with the DPSNboard. In the same conditions, the value for the COMPIN board would be approximatively3dB higher.

Luminance bandwidth 0.15 to 5.5MHz ± 0.5dB (-3dB at 5.7MHz)

Luminance signal to noise ratio (ramp pattern, filtered and weighted) set A

set B

≥ 61dB

≥ 60dB

Differential gain ≤ 1.5%

Differential phase ≤ 2°

Luminance amplitude linearity 700mV ± 14mV

ENCODER + DECODERCHARACTERISTICSNTSC STANDARD

(excluding VTR and synchronised modes)


Measurement conditions set A (video encoding)

4:2:2P, GOP 1/1, 50Mbit/s, 720 pixels

Measurement conditions set B (video encoding)

4:2:0MP@ML, GOP 12/3, 14Mbit/s, 720 pixels

Luminance bandwidth (set B) 0.15 to 3.8MHz ± 0.5dB (-3dB at 4.1MHz)

Luminance signal to noise ratio (ramp pattern, filtered and weighted) set A

set B

≥ 61dB

≥ 60dB

Differential gain ≤ 2%


Luminance amplitude linearity 700mV ± 14mV


PAL STANDARD(excluding VTR and synchronised modes)




The COMPIN board features a VTR mode which is recommended for using badquality, jittered signals. In VTR mode, the sampling is made on 8 bits instead of 10and the bandwidth is around 3MHz.

The COMPIN board features a built-in synchroniser. This synchroniser can be usedin order to synchronise video input to an external composite video reference. Thissynchroniser can also be used with or without an external reference in order to helpthe encoder to deal with bad quality signals.

The COMPIN board does not add any delay, except when the built-in synchroniseris activated and in that case it adds approximatively 30ms in 50Hz and 25ms in60Hz. The synchroniser drops or repeats a frame when the accumulative delaybetween the input and the reference is excessive. Hence the lipsync evolves like asawtooth between - 10ms and + 30ms (in 50Hz, without reference signal).

In normal mode and in NTSC standard, the COMPIN board can be programmed totake into account or not a 7.5 IRE setup.

1.4.2 - Description of optional functions

1.4.2.1 - ASI TS input (option)

Sales reference: N41STS1NAK

ASI standard TS input on a female 75Ω BNC connector.

The 270Mbit/s signal can carry 188/204 length TS packets. The max. TS data rate is54Mbit/s. The TS Input interface accepts both data burst and data packetmodes. Incoming data must be spread over time, so that no more than one TS packetis received over a period of 26µs.

The external TS ASI input can be used for encoder cascading: up to three encoderscan be cascaded by connecting the ASI output of one encoder to the ASI input ofanother one. This results in an MPTS with consistent PSI/SI tables, each videosource having its own PCR unless the locking on incoming PCR is used (see thesection below).

To perform encoder cascading from the front panel, only one parameter must be set.When encoders are cascaded, incoming PID/service-id can be remapped to avoidconflicts.



Notes:- DBE 4110 TS OUT connected to DBE 4110 TS IN operates with a cable up to 200m inlength, BELDEN 8281 type.- A programme going from ASI IN to ASI OUT will undergo a PCR jitter increase of +/-75ns max. The maximum PCR jitter allowed by DVB standard is +/- 500ns. A programmeencoded by a DBE 41XX will present an original PCR jitter of +/- 37.5 ns max.

∗ Locking on incoming PCR

This function requires the ASI TS input option.

It is possible to create a single programme with components generated by more thanone encoder. The principal application is the generation of a programme containingone video component and many audio components, like a "mosaic" programme or amutilingual programme.

All encoders must receive the same video source (even an encoder which is usedonly for audio encoding), and all encoders must use the same PCR. All encodersmust be set to provide the same end to end delay.

The use of the same PCR by all encoders is made possible by the new ability of theencoder to lock its internal PCR generator on the PCR coming from a componentpresent in the ASI TS input stream.

We recommend that you limit the cascade to three or less devices.

If a progam requires more than three encoders, it is better to install them in paralleland use a multiplexer to gather the components.

TS IN

VIDEO IN

TS OUT

DBE 41xx

TS IN

VIDEO IN

TS OUT

DBE 41xx

TS IN

VIDEO IN

TS OUT

DBE 41xx



1.4.2.2 - DVB Common Scr. (option)

Sales reference: N41SDVCFAK

This option includes the capability to scramble the outgoing transport streamaccording to the DVB common scrambling standard. The DBE 4110 is fullycompliant with the scrambling features defined by EBU (BISS modes 1 and E), forexchanging scrambled MPEG-2 streams. The control word is fixed.

The fixed control word can be set using the front panel. No ECMs are broadcast inthis case, and there is no need for EMM generation. The control word must beentered in the decoder to enable descrambling.

Attention : 1. The incoming stream from the ASI input cannot be scrambled from the front panel andthe Fast_DSNG software. To scramble the incoming stream, the encoder must becontrolled by the DBS 2930 software with the N2930140 option (fixed control word) andthe DBS 2908/11/12 MPEG Channel Controller.2. The BISS mode E is only controlled by the front panel.

TS IN

VIDEO IN

TS OUT

DBE 41xx

TS IN

VIDEO IN

TS OUT

DBE 41xx

TS IN

VIDEO IN

TS OUT

DBE 41xx

TS IN

TS IN

TS IN

TS OUT

DBX 4300



1.4.2.3 - MPEG-2 4:2:2P@ML (option)

Sales reference: N41S422PAK

Switching between 4:2:0MP@ML and 4:2:2P@ML is not seamless.

CHARACTERISTICS

Video source 50/60Hz frequency Interlaced /progressive 4:2:2 video 10 bits

Encoding format 720 pixels 576 lines (50Hz) or 480 lines (60Hz)

GOP parameters 1 ≤ M ≤ 3 M ≤ N ≤ 24 Possibility of closed GOP Frame picture with adaptive field/frame encoding modes (motion estimation and DCT) Seamless M and N parameter changing

Bit rate VBV model implementation Bit rate type: CBR Bit rate parameters:

100kbit/s steps0.5Mbit/s ≤ bit rate ≤ 50Mbit/s(bitrates below 4Mbit/s are reserved for almost still pictures, depending on encoding resolution and picture complexity)

Seamless bit rate change

Miscellaneous functions Capture and transmission of Digital Vertical Time Code. 75% bar pattern insertion

Video buffer management Leak mode

Delay Delay from SDI encoder input to PTS value (+/- 5ms): 740ms (50Hz), 617ms (60Hz), guaranteed delay from 4 to 50Mbit/s.



1.4.2.4 - RS232 (option)

Sales reference: N41SD56KAK

Description:

- 1200 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400 baud,- 1 start bit,- 1 stop bit,- 8 data bits,- no parity,- protocol: raw data is directly used to supply the TS packet payload. The

DBE 4110 adjusts the adaptation field of each packet according to thenumber of bytes received from the data injection through RS232,

- SubD9 SERIAL 1 RS232 connector.



1.4.2.5 - Ext. Modulator C&C (option)

Sales reference: N41SM0DCAK

The following modulators are operated from the DBE 4110 front panel and/or fromthe Stand-Alone Control & Command software and/or the Fast_DSNG software:

Newtec modulator parameters are included in the prestored configurations in theDBE 4110 that can be recalled at a key stroke.

Notes:1. The L band output of the modulator (IFL) is for monitoring purposes only and cannot beswitched off.2. An RS485 cord is provided with the option for Control & Command between theencoder and the modulator.

Modulator models up-converters ASI input interface

NTC2062"2062ZP", "2062ZR", "2062ZQ", "2062ZK", "2062ZM", "2062ZL".

NTC3631xZ"3631BZ", "3631DZ", "3631EZ", "3631FZ", "3631GZ", "3631HZ", "3631IZ", "3631KZ", "3631LZ", "3631GE", "3631AZ", "3631TB".

NTC3359AE

NTC2080"2080ZP", "2080ZR", "2080ZT", "2080ZQ", "2080ZK", "2080ZM", "2080ZO", "2080ZL".

NTC2077Sx"2077SP", "2077SR", "2077ST", "2077SK", "2077SM", "2077SO".

without

NTC2077Hx"2077HP", "2077HR", "2077HT", "2077HQ", "2077HK", "2077HM", "2077HO", "2077HL".

without

NTC2077Fx"2077FM", "2077FT", "2077FO", "2077FQ", "2077FL", "2077FR".

without



1.4.2.6 - DPSN board (option)

Sales reference: N41HDPSNAK

This board offers the composite video input.

The DPSN board fits in the upper 6U slot, instead of the COMPIN board..

Use of DPSN board adds approximately 20ms in 50Hz and 17ms in 60Hz.

Caution: The COMPIN board is recommended for customers having PAL and NTSCsignals.

INPUT CHARACTERISTICS

Standard PAL BDGHI / NTSC M / SECAM(ITU-R Rec. 624)

Correction / input impedance BNC / 75Ω

Input level (100% white bar) 1 volt peak-to-peak, nominal, with sync signal


PAL STANDARD


Measurement conditions/videoencoding

4:2:0 MP@ML, 14Mbit/s, 720 pixels/line, 12/3 GOP

Luminance bandwidth 0.15 to 5.5MHz ± 0.5dB (-3dB at 5.7MHz)

Luminance signal to noise ratio (grey level)

≥ 58dB

Differential gain ≤ 2%


Luminance amplitude linearity ≤ 700 mV ±14 mV



1.4.2.7 - 4 stereo audios (option)

Sales reference: N41HAMUBAK

Figure 1.5: Audio block diagram with AMuSE and SSEB

The AMuSE board features either 4 MPEG-1 audio encoders in accordance withISO/IEC 11172-3, layer 2, 48 kHz standard or 4 AC3 packetisers.

Common features:- the AMuSE board fits in the lower 6U slot,- the DBE 4110 accepts one AMuSE board,- it is not possible to set up an AMuSE board partly in MPEG-1 encoder and

partly in AC3 packetiser,- when the SDI is selected, the same group number from the four possible

groups must be supplied for encoders 1 and 2. The same rule applies forencoders 3 and 4.

MPEG-1 audio encoding features:- each of the four encoders can independently receive its input from the SDI

or AES/EBU.The AES/EBU input is either balanced on SubD15 (AES 3/1992, 110Ωinput impedance) or unbalanced on BNC (SMPTE 276M, 75Ω input

ATADI boardTS Out

Pre-multiplexer

1&2&3&4balanced unbalanced

DAC

Analogue stereo

Onegroup

De-embedder

Onegroup

AES/EBU

AES/EBU

AES/EBU

AES/EBU

2 3 41SDIIN

SDIOUT

SDI DIGITAL AUDIO

SFC

Encoder

SFC

Encoder

SFC

Encoder

SFC

Encoder

Multiplexer

ANALOGUE AUDIO

Encoder

De-embedder

One group

SDI

Encoder

DAC

Analogue stereo

AMuSE SSEB

SDIIN2 Analogue stereo

SFC: Sampling Frequency Converter



impedance). The selection is made by the Control & Command station; allAES/EBU inputs are either balanced or unbalanced.

- audio de-embedding is always possible and is not dependent on the videoencoder input. Audio de-embedding complies with SMPTE 272M.

- it supports input PCM samples at 32, 44.1 or 48kHz (SDI allows only48kHz).

- before encoding, the audio stream goes through a sample rate converter.Thus, the audio stream is resampled at 48kHz and synchronised with theprogramme clock reference.

- for each audio encoder, possible rate / mode combinations are listed in thetable below:

- all command running is seamless apart from audio/video compensationdelay modification.

- each of the four audio encoders has audio pattern generation capability(1kHz, -6dBFS signal).

- when there is no video component, the MPEG-1 encoder is in radio modeand the delay (from SDI encoder input to PTS value, +/- 5ms) becomesequal to 150ms (50Hz and 60Hz).

AC3 packetiser features:- the AMuSE board accepts up to 4 externally encoded Dolby AC3 streams

and performs PES and TS packetisation on these streams.- accepted external Dolby AC3 encoders: DP567 (AC3 stereo), DP569 (AC3

stereo and surround) - 32, 40 and 48kbit/s rates are not supported.- input data packing: professional mode 32 bit (ch1, and ch2).- external Dolby AC3 encoder sampling frequency must be set to 48kHz.- external Dolby AC3 encoder delay must be set to 179ms.- any AMuSE input can be used. If SDI input is used, the SDI input of

AMuSE must be synchronous with the SDI input of SSEB. If the AES/EBUinput (either balanced or unbalanced) is used, the external Dolby encoder

Rate (kbit/s)Mode

64 96 128 192 256 384

Single Channel (Mono) X X X X

Dual Channel X X X X

Stereo X X X X

Joint Stereo X X X X



must be genlocked by the sync output of AMuSE.- AMuSE AC3 packetiser is not possible together with a video component in

low or ultra low delay mode.- when there is no video component, the AC3 encoder is in radio mode and

the delay (from external AC3 encoder to PTS value, +/- 5ms) becomesequal to 349ms (50Hz and 60Hz).

- when an AC3 component is generated, a descriptor is automatically addedto the PMT (descriptor private id 106).

1.4.2.8 - 2 AES/EBU interfaces (option)

Sales reference: N41HATADAK

Figure 1.6: Audio block diagram with ATADI and SSEB

The ATADI board provides AES/EBU interfaces for the two audio MPEG-1encoders located on the SSEB board of the encoder.

AES/EBU interfaces are either balanced on SubD15 (AES 3/1992,110Ω inputimpedance) or unbalanced on BNC (SMPTE 276M, 75Ω input impedance). Theselection is made by the Control & Command station; all AES/EBU inputs areeither balanced or unbalanced.

DAC

Analogue stereo

Multiplexer

ANALOGUE AUDIO

Encoder

De-embedder

One group

SDI

Encoder

DAC

Analogue stereo

SFC

1 & 2balanced unbalanced

AES/EBU

AES/EBU

21

DIGITAL AUDIO

SFC

SSEB ATADI

TS Out

SDIIN2 Analogue stereo

AMuSE board

SFC: Sampling Frequency Converter



The ATADI board fits in the upper 3U slot.

It supports input PCM samples at 32, 44.1 or 48 kHz.

The ATADI board performs a sampling frequency conversion to 48KHz,synchronised with the programme clock reference.

1.4.2.9 - Int. modulator (option)

Sales reference: N41HMODUAK

The ISMB board fits in the lower 6U slot.

The ISMB board is an internal modulator which takes the TS stream produced bythe encoder and transforms it into a modulated form. Three modulations areavailable : QPSK, 8PSK, 16QAM. Output is both IF and L-band.

When the ISMB is used, TS packets must be in (188+16) form.

The features of ISMB board are listed in the following table:

Standards EN 300421, EN 301210

Input Bit rate 1.5 to 28 Mbit/s

FEC Energy dispersal PRBS, 24 or 32 bits

Reed Solomon Encoder 188+16 format (synchro byte included) correction capability

Interleaving I = 12

Convolution 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8, 8/9Depth: K=7

Impulse response cos (linear phase)

Roll off 26% and 35%, or Automatic (depending on modulation scheme)

IF output Modulation QPSK, 8PSK, 16QAM



An RS485 cord is provided with the ISMB board. This cord externally links theISMB board to the encoder and is used for the control&command. This cord is thesame as the one described in the section "External Modulator Control". "ExternalModulator Control" option is not required to operate the ISMB board.

1.4.2.10 - Alarm Relay Closure (option)

Sales reference: N41HMSDLAK

This function consists of two boards: the RSMAINT board and the MSDL board.

In the event of a major alarm, an alarm loop (voltage free contact) is activated onthe MSDL board.

Bit/Symbol ratio 2, 3 or 4

Symbol rate 0.9 to 16 MSymbol/s

Frequency (RF) variable 70/140MHz, selectable within 50 to 180MHz range, by 125KHz step

Stability +/- 15ppm

Level -20dBm to +5dBm, by 0.5dB steps

Amplitude accuracy +/- 0.2dB

Quadrature error +/- 2°

Eye closure 5% (full Nyquist filtering)

Return loss -23dB min.

Phase noise -96dBc at F=100kHz

Harmonics -45dB min.

Spurious performance (modulated carrier) in 4KHz

-55dBc/4kHz at -10dBm (ref. INTELSAT -IESS)

IF LO Local oscillator for block-converter synchronisation

100MHz

L-Band O/P Frequency range 0.950 to 1.750GHz by 1kHz step

Stability +/- 50ppm

Level variable, -20dBm to +5dBm, by 0.5dB step



It is possible to activate the alarm relay either on major alarms or on major andminor alarms. The choice is made in the encoder advanced parameters in theTechnical configuration application.

∗ RSMAINT board

This board is connected to the front of the device, behind the front panel, in theupper slot, and provides frontal access to the normal/fail switch associated with thealarm relay (MSDL board).

The RSMAINT board also hosts a maintenance RS232 link (SubD9).

∗ MSDL board

This board hosts the alarm relay and the corresponding SubD9 connector givingaccess to the two voltage free contacts.The maximum DC voltage supported is 48V. The MSDL board also hosts the Dynamux SubD9 connector.The MSDL board fits in the lower 3U slot.

1.4.2.11 - XLR adapter cord (option)

Sales reference: N41HAXLRAK

This is an adapter cord with one end terminated by four XLR connectors and theother end terminated by a SubD15 connector.

The cord is approximatively one metre long. It can be used with SSEB analogueaudio inputs, or ATADI digital audio inputs, or AMuSE digital audio inputs.

1.4.2.12 - Source switching tolerance

When the video input signal of the encoder is the result of a switch between twosignals, a transient perturbation can be observed, its importance and its durationdepend on the following factors:

timing relationship between the two signals, instant of the switch (relative to beginning of a frame), encoder video input used (SDI, composite), encoder video processing involved.

When the video input signal is the result of a switch between two signals which aresynchronous (same 27MHz for both) and if the switching action is compliant with



SMPTE RP168 (which mainly defines line number and part of line allowed forswiching), the following table predicts the visible effect of the switch:

1.4.3 - AC power supply

Video input and processingTime difference

between switched signalsa

a.Outside this range, there is a possibility of a black output after the switching during a few seconds.

Effects on video

SDI on SSEB/ SSEB 0 to +/- 1/2 line image perturbation during one image

analogue on DPSN / SSEB 0 to +/- 1/2 line image perturbation during several images

analogue on COMPIN / SSEB 0 to +/- 1/2 line image perturbation during several images

analogue on COMPIN - (syn-chroniser mode) / SSEB

any image perturbation during several images

analogue on COMPIN - (VTR mode) / SSEB

0 to +/- 9µs image perturbation during several images

analogue on COMPIN - (VTR and synchroniser modes) /

SSEB

0 to +/- 1/2 line image perturbation during several images

CHARACTERISTICS

Mains voltage 100V - 230V (one range with no switching)

Mains frequency 50Hz - 60Hz

Current rating 2A - 1A

Inrush current < 50A at 230V (cold start)

Network connection Type A device connected by a non-indus-trial CEI 60320 compliant plug



1.4.4 - Mechanical characteristics

Unit width: 19,

Unit mounting centre distance in cabinet: 467mm,

Unit height: 2U (88mm),

Unit depth (including connectors): 620mm

Isolation class I

Installation category II

Earthing arrangement TN, TTa

Mains fuse T4A H250V, dimensions 5x20mma.For Norway and only for this country, the device can be connected to an earthing arrangement of ITtype for a voltage between phases of 230V.

Other features of the power supply unit

Power factor (cos Φ) 0.98

Performance factor 70% (typical on 230VAC)

Overheating protection yesa

a.After overheating protection has triggered, the DBE 4110 will only re-start after OFF/ON on thepower outlet switch.

Overload protection yes

Fuse integrated

CHARACTERISTICS



Figure 1.7: Dimensions

448

620

Air Inlet

Air Outlet

483

88

MPEG-2DBE 4110DVB

ESC

ENT

SHIFT

467

6.35



Weight: 13.7kg in its basic version, 15.3kg in its heaviest version.

The exact weight depends on the presence of the optional modules; the followingtables give the exact weight of each module with the corresponding slot allocationseen from the rear panel of the equipment.

Notes:1. A 2TE cache is delivered with the 4TE AMuSE board to fill 6TE slot number 2.2. If there is no board in a slot, a cache is set in the empty allocation.

slot 0

slot 4 slot 1

slot 3 slot 2

Slot allocation DBE 4110 chassis (without board) 10.60kg

0 SSEB board 1.87kg

1 DPSN boardor COMPIN board

0.88kg0.90kg

2 AMuSE board + 2TE (see note 1)ISMB board

or 6TE 6U cache (see note 2)

1.03 + 0.18kg1.15kg0.17kg

3 MSDL boardor 3TE 6U cache (see note 2)

0.33kg0.08kg

4 ATADI boardor 3TE 4U cache (see note 2)

0.33kg0.06kg

In the front panel RSMAINT board 0.06kg



1.4.5 - Environmental specifications

∗ CE labelling

In compliance with the 93/68/CEE (22/07/93) directive.

∗ Safety specifications

Legislation

Complies with European Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC (73/02) amended by93/68/EEC.

Standards

EN 60950 recommendations, 3rd edition, 2000/06,

UL 60950 and CSA C22.2 N°950-095, certification file n° E226371.

∗ Electromagnetic specifications

Legislation

Complies with Directive 89/336/EEC (73/02) amended by 93/68/EEC (93/07).

Standards

EN 55022, edition 1999 for Emission, including EN 61000-3-2,

EN 55024, edition 1999 for Immunity,

FCC Part 15, Class A.

∗ Relative humidity: 90% max., non condensing at 40°C (in operation).

∗ Operating temperature range: 0°C to 45°C (80% R.H.max, non condensing).

∗ Storage temperature range: -10°C to 70°C.



∗ Mechanical specifications:

Shock, transport category, TQC-TCE FP-M 204e level 2, Vibrations: during operation:

- vertical amplitude:- constant displacement 0.75mm peak to peak from 10 to 31Hz, - constant acceleration 1.5G (peak) from 31 to 150 Hz.

- sweep rate: 1 octave per minute,- duration of 1 sweep cycle: 7.8 mn,- quantity of sweep cycles: 10,- 3 axes.

∗ Ventilated air flow: 100m3/h (the DBE 41xx has fans for forced air cooling).The output air is hotter than the input air, about 5°C.

∗ Pollution degree: 2

∗ Protection degree: IP 20



∗ Reliability: table of MTBF at 30°

Basic encoder without hardware options: MTBF at 30°C is 108,000h.

Item MTBF (h)

Power supply Alpha 400 (AC)SSEBFront panel LCDBackplaneDPSNCOMPINAMuSEATADIMSDLRSMAINTISMB

563 000190 000

1 940 0006 250 000

631 000812 000399 000

2 940 0009 630 000

> 20 000 000909 000



1.4.6 - Equipment view

Figure 1.8: DBE 4110 unit top view

BACKconnectors

BOARDS

MAINS

9U

FAN

S

FAN

Front Panel

POWER SUPPLY

BACKPLANE

maintenancelink

normal/failswitch

600

AIRFLOW

AIRFLOW

420

448

19 (483) FRONT

20



Figure 1.9: DBE 4110 rear and front panel

MPEG-2DBE 4110DVB

ESC

ENT

SHIFT

SDI IN SERIAL 1 LAN SERIAL 2 PCR OUT

RS 232/485 10BaseT RS 485

TS ASI IN OUT 1 OUT 2 OUT 3

I

O

T

PhN

COMPOSiTEVIDEO IN DPSN

ON MONITORFREQGAIN

EQ

SSEB

ATADI

BALANCED UNBALANCED

AUDIO IN

ANALOG

REMOTE IF LO IF OUT L BAND OUTALARM


Chapter 2 - Installation 47

Chapter 2Installation

2.1 - Encoder installation ............................................................................. 502.1.1 - Manual switch setting ..................................................................... 502.1.2 - Desktop installation......................................................................... 532.1.3 - Rack installation.............................................................................. 532.1.4 - Mains power supply and protective earth ....................................... 55

2.1.4.1 - Power supply ................................................................................. 552.1.4.2 - Connection to the techical earth .................................................... 562.1.4.3 - On/Off switch ................................................................................. 56

2.2 - Board connections............................................................................... 572.2.1 - SSEB board (slot 0) ........................................................................ 582.2.2 - DPSN board (slot 1)........................................................................ 652.2.3 - COMPIN board (slot 1) ................................................................... 662.2.4 - AMUSE board (slot 2)..................................................................... 682.2.5 - ISMB board (slot 2)......................................................................... 732.2.6 - ATADI board (slot 4) ....................................................................... 752.2.7 - Alarm Relay Closure....................................................................... 772.2.8 - Modulator Control&Command ........................................................ 79

2.3 - Switching on the device ...................................................................... 80

2.4 - Cable corrector in the case of a composite input ............................. 812.4.1 - DPSN board.................................................................................... 812.4.2 - COMPIN board ............................................................................... 82

2.5 - Installing Stand-Alone software.......................................................... 842.5.1 - Scope.............................................................................................. 842.5.2 - Installation....................................................................................... 84

2.5.2.1 - Environment ................................................................................... 842.5.2.2 - Interface language for the applications .......................................... 852.5.2.3 - Setup procedure ............................................................................ 85

2.5.3 - Running the software...................................................................... 95

2.6 - Installing optional boards.................................................................... 97


48 Chapter 2 - Installation

2.6.1 - Installing a board ............................................................................ 972.6.2 - Removing the board ....................................................................... 98

2.7 - Installing software options.................................................................. 99


Chapter 2 49

" PROCEDURE

The following five steps are necessary before your encoder is ready for use:

1) Install the encoder. Installation involves the following steps: manually set switches. observe certain principles. install the encoder in a rack.

2) Connect the encoder to other devices.3) Switch on the device.4) Adjust the cable corrector if the link exceeds 10m.5) Install the control and command software.

These various operations are described in the following sections.


50 Chapter 22.1 - Encoder installation

2.1 - ENCODER INSTALLATION

The DBE 4110 encoder is designed for use in a horizontal position.The On/Off switch and the power cord should be within reach so that the device canbe switched off easily.

2.1.1 - Manual switch setting

" SSEB board - Set input impedance (audio)

The four switches LEFT 1, RIGHT 1, LEFT 2 and RIGHT 2 (mark 1) set incomingaudio impedance. Each one comprises 2 switches which must be moved as a pair.

The default setting is 600Ω.

Figure 2.1: SSEB board switch setting

Switch Up: high impedance

Switch Down: 600Ω impedance

1 UP


Chapter 2 51 2.1 - Encoder installation

" MSDL and RSMAINT boards - The different elements of alarm relay closure areshown in the following block diagram:

Figure 2.2: Alarm relay closure diagram

Enabling/Disabling the alarm relay

In the event of a prompt alarm from the main processing board, a contact dryloop is activated on the MSDL board. The S2 switch (RSMAINT board)disables the alarm relay. The red LED (UNIT FAIL) comes on on the frontpanel of the device to signal the presence of a prompt alarm (regardless of S2setting).

Note: Do not forget to set the S2 switch from "Test/Alarm" back to "Normal" once thefault has been corrected.

Alarm monitoring

1 = Alarm

S1 & S2: Choice ofalarm relay mode

SSEB1

6

SubD9AlarmRelay

MSDL

normal

normal

(fail)

1 (fail)

RSMAINT

N T/Aswitch

S2

Unit Fail LEDon Encoderfront panel

1 = on

0 = relay closed(normal)1 = relay open (alarm)

0 = relay open(normal)1 = relay closed (alarm)

CLOSED: PB OPEN: PB



Choice of alarm relay mode

In a system configuration with several DBE 41xx devices, the user can chooseto interconnect the dry contacts of the alarm relays in series or parallel. Thesetting of the two microswitches on the MSDL board determines either open orclosed contact mode:

- choosing open contact for the alarm relay, associated with an unack-nowledged fault means that all dry loop contacts must be set in series,

- choosing closed contact for the alarm relay, associated with an unack-nowledged fault means that all dry loop contacts must be set in parallel.

Note: The dry contact always signals an operating fault, including a power failure anddevice shutdown.

Micro-switch onMSDL board open: PB closed: PB

Fault no yes no yes

Switch S2(N-T/A)

on RSMAINT board

left(N)

right(T/A)

left(N)

right(T/A)

left(N)

right(T/A)

left(N)

right(T/A)

Comment nocomment

loop test

unack.fault

ack. fault

nocomment

loop test

unack. fault

ack. fault

Contact status closed open open closed open closed closed open

Red "UNITFAIL" LED

off on on on off on on on



2.1.2 - Desktop installation

The DBE 4110 encoder is fitted with four small plastic feet to ensure a minimumspace of 1cm is guaranteed between the power supply of the encoder and thedesktop for safety reasons.

2.1.3 - Rack installation

Principles

" Prevent outgoing hot air being reinjected into other devices." Ensure an equal and acceptable air flow to the air-capture points of all devices." Avoid the effects due to natural convection between devices." Avoid short-cuts between hot and cold air and vice versa." Avoid transversal effects with connected racks." Avoid thermal pockets (obstruction of hot air)." Check the air flow rate that will be used.

If the encoder is installed in a rack, the plastic feet can be removed.

The device should be mounted on L-profiles in the rack. These should be lowprofile to ensure adequate air flow (see Figure 2.3).

Note: The DBE 4110 encoder does not feature air filters. If used in a dusty environment, afiltered rack should be used.



The various types of L-profile are shown below:

Figure 2.3: Possible installation types

2U

2U

2U1U

1U

1U

Encoder front panel

1) Standard L-profiles

2) Special L-profiles

3) Widened L-profiles2cm min.

4cm max.

Encoder front panel

Encoder front panel

Encoder front panel

Encoder front panel

Encoder front panel

4cm VV

5mm

D = depends on rack

Side viewFront view

2cm4cm4cm

4cm D



2.1.4 - Mains power supply and protective earth

2.1.4.1 - Power supply

" " " " 100 - 230V AC Mains Power

Connector

Figure 2.4: Mains power connector

Fuse

Fuse characteristics: T4AH250V, dimensions 5 x 20mm, can be accessed from thepower connector.

Mains power supply cable

The mains cable is not supplied with the device. You are advised to use a mainscable with the following features:

Device end of cable: CEI320 compliant connector, Wire: 3x1mm2 or 18 AWG section, 10A minimum compliant with the appli-

cable standard or rules of the country where the device is installed, Mains outlet end of cable: plug compliant with the applicable standard or rules

of the country where the device is installed.

Important: For continued protection against risk of fire, replace only with sametype and rating of fuse.

fuse holder

On/Off switch

mains connector



Mains supplies connecting

The equipment is pluggable type A. The building installation must feature overloadand earth fault protection and a bipolar cut-off device or a differential circuit break.

The connection panel should comply with the legislation in force in the country ofinstallation. Connection panel position in the rack must ensure that plug and powercord are within easy reach for switching off purposes.

Ensure that the device is connected correctly. If you are in any doubt, consult aqualified electrician.

2.1.4.2 - Connection to the techical earth

The pin to the right of the connector is used to ground the device to ensure equipo-tential grounding between the different devices in the technical centre

2.1.4.3 - On/Off switch

While the encoder is not connected to other devices, keep the On/Off switch set toOff.


Chapter 2 57 2.2 - Board connections

2.2 - BOARD CONNECTIONS

Once the encoder itself has been installed, the boards need to be connected.

The DBE 4110 device has five slots of 402mm depth:

- 2 x 6 U slots- 2 x 3 U slots- 1 x 9 U slot.

Figure 2.5: DBE 4110 encoder rear panel

Note:You are strongly recommended not to leave empty slots without blank panels as ventilationcould be impaired.

Slot 0 (9U 5TE)

Slot 4 (3U 4TE)

Slot 3 (3U 6TE)

Slot 1 (6U 4TE)

Slot 2 (6U 6TE)

DBE 4110

COMPIN or DPSN (option)

SSEB (standard)

AMuSE (option) or ISMB (option)Alarm Relay Closure

ATADI (option)

(option)


58 Chapter 22.2 - Board connections

2.2.1 - SSEB board (slot 0)

SSEB board

Connector Description

# AUDIO INANALOGUE

2 stereo audio / 2 double mono inputs are available on a 15-pinfemale Sub-D connector.

Characteristics:

Balanced signal, Female Sub-D connector,

Input impedance: 600Ω / 18kΩ (manual switching on the board), Inputs without transformer.

The DBE 4110 is provided with a SubD - 4 XLR adapter cord. Each channel is assigned an XLR connector, as described in the following table.

1 2 3 4 6 7 85

ContactSignalContact Signal12345

GNDL1

67

9

/R1

L1

GNDR1L2

/L1

8

101112131415

/L2GNDL2

/R2GNDR2R2

R1 GND

GND

GND

XLR colour Channel

brown Left channel 1 (L1, /L1, GNDL1)

red Right channel 1 (R1, /R1, GNDR1)

orange Left channel 2 (L2, /L2, GNDL2)

yellow Right channel 2 (R2, /R2, GNDR2)



$ SDI IN The "SDI input" connector receives a 270Mbit/s SDI signal in serialformat (625 and 525 lines).

Characteristics:

Female BNC coaxial connector, Impedance: 75Ω.

Use a FILOTEX KX6-A type cable or equivalent assembled with a75Ω male BNC connector from RADIALL (ref.: R142085000) orequivalent. Cable length is 0-200m.

% SERIAL 1RS232/485

The "SERIAL 1 RS232/485 syn./async. private data" connector isused to inject low flow digital data into the DBE 4110.

Characteristics in RS232 asynchronous mode:

Female 9-pin Sub-D connector,

For RS232 asynchronous mode, only pins 2, 3 & 5 are used.

For other modes, contact NEXTREAM.

SSEB board

1 2 3 4 6 7 85

ContactSignal Contact Signal12345

TXRX

6789

/TX/RX

TX CK

RX CKGND

/RX CK

/TX CK



& LAN10BaseT

Depending on the type of the SSEB board, the LEDs have different signalling (see below). To know the board type installed in the equipment, select the OTHER/Tools/About/Information command on the device front panel. The board type (HWD 1,2 or 4) is given on the third line.

The Ethernet link is dedicated to device supervision.

This link is also used for injecting ECMs and low bitrate data (64 kb/s).

Characteristics: 10BaseT connector according to IEEE 802.3 standard, Rated transmission bitrate: 10Mb/s, Maximum cable length: 10 metres (unshielded twisted pairs), 3 LEDs to indicate link operation.

Rx = Rx frames received by the deviceTx = Tx frames sent by the deviceLINK = link on (carrier detected).

SSEB board

1 2 3 4 6 7 85

Rx LINK

Tx

Ethernet LEDs, HWD 4 type



& LAN10BaseT

Or

TRAFFIC ON= Rx and/or Tx frames exchangedPOLARITY ON= Rx pair polarity correct

LINK = link level set (test pulses exchanged with partner)).

Cables used:For a direct connection to an operating station, use a cross cable to link the Tx pairs of the Encoders RJ45 connector to the Rx pairs of the PCs RJ45 connector.The cable delivered with the device is a cross cable.

For connection to a hub, you are generally advised to use a straight (point to point) cable as crossing often occurs in the HUB which then bears the X symbol. Please refer to the Hub User Manual.

SSEB board

1 2 3 4 6 7 85

TRAFFIC

LINK

POLARITY

Ethernet LEDs, HWD 1 or 2 type

DBE 4110 PCEthernet 10BaseT cross cable

DBE 4110

HUB

Ethernet 10BaseT straight cable

PCEthernet 10BaseT straight cable x



' SERIAL 2RS485

The RS485 9-pin Sub-D connector marked SERIAL 2 RS485 isused to control the Newtec modulator.

Characteristics:

Female 9-pin Sub-D connector,

Asynchronous RS485, Maximum transmission rate: 38400 bauds.

For other uses, contact NEXTREAM.

SSEB board

1 2 3 4 6 7 85


RXTX

6789

/RX/TX

reserved

reservedreserved

reserved

reserved



( PCR OUT Characteristics:SubD 9 connector

The PCR is computed on 42 bits, at a 27MHz frequency. The 33 msb (most significant bits) are the base and the 9 lsb (least significant bits) the extension. The "PCR out" connector only sends the 33 msb. PCR recurrence is 26.5 hours.

) TS ASI IN This connector accepts a signal in TS serial format (ASI mode).

Characteristics:


Use a FILOTEX KX6-A type cable or equivalent assembled with a75Ω male BNC connector from RADIALL (ref.: R142085000) orequivalent.

SSEB board

1 2 3 4 6 7 85


5

CKWIN

678

/CK/WIN

DATA

GND

/DATA

CLOCK6.75 MHz

PCR WIN

33 bits42 undefined bitsPCR base

SERIALPCR base

CLOCK

B32 B31

1 34 76

B30 B29 B28 B27 B0B1

PCR WIN

SERIALPCR base

Zoom Zoom



* TS ASI OUT Three connectors deliver a signal in TS serial format (ASI mode).

Characteristics:


Use a FILOTEX KX6-A type cable or equivalent assembledwith a 75Ω male BNC connector from RADIALL (ref.:R142085000) or equivalent.

SSEB board

1 2 3 4 6 7 85



2.2.2 - DPSN board (slot 1)

DPSN board


# COMPOSITEVIDEO IN

The "composite video input" connector receives an analogue compo-site video input signal.

Characteristics:



$ GAIN, FREQ and ON

See section 2.4 - Cable corrector in the case of a composite input - for information on using the GAIN and FREQ potentiometers and the meaning of the "ON" LED.

% MONITOR The MONITOR output is used for adjusting cable correction, parti-cularly in the case of links exceeding 10 m.

Characteristics:



1 2 3



2.2.3 - COMPIN board (slot 1)

COMPIN board


# COMPOSITEVIDEO IN

The "composite video input" connector receives an analogue compo-site video input signal.

Characteristics:



$ GAIN, FREQ and EQ

See section 2.4 - Cable corrector in the case of a composite input - for information on using the GAIN and FREQ potentiometers and the meaning of the "EQ" LED.

% MON OUT The MONITOR output is used for adjusting cable correction, parti-cularly in the case of links exceeding 10 m, or for monitoring purposes.

The MONITOR output is not suitable for measurements on thesignal.

Characteristics:


1 2 3 4



& REF IN The REF IN connector can receive either a composite video inputsignal or a black burst to allow video input stream synchronisation.

If the board is in synchroniser mode, but without any REF IN signal,then the board synchronises the video input stream with an internalreference.

Characteristics:



COMPIN board

1 2 3 4



2.2.4 - AMUSE board (slot 2)

AMuSE board


# SDI IN The SDI 270 Mbit/s serial input features up to eight embeddedstereo audio channels. This interface has the following features:

SDI compliant with SMPTE 259M (4:2:2 Component part), Embedding compliant with SMPTE 272M.

Characteristics: Female BNC coaxial connector, Impedance: 75Ω.


1 2 3 4 5 6



# SDI OUT Description:The AMuSE board duplicates the incoming SDI signal to supplythe SSEB board, thereby avoiding the need for an external distribu-tion amplifier.

"SDI OUT" is an active loop-through of the SDI input, after signalreshaping. This copy is used, either to monitor the input, or tocascade the AMuSE board with a video compression board (SSEB).For these 2 applications you do not require a long cable.

"SDI out" is compliant with the 259M SMPTE standard, for amaximum cable length of 50 metres.



AMuSE board

1 2 3 4 5 6

SDI in OptionalAMuSE board

Up to 4 AES3

SDI loopthrough

SSEBboard

TS Out

DBE 41xx

onBackplane



$ AUD DIN Bal

The digital audio inputs are an alternative solution to SDIembedded audio.Description:Two sets of connectors/standards are available to the user: SubD15and AES IN 1 to 4.Characteristics:

balanced: a specific cable is provided with the board. Thiscable links the SubD15 connector to 4 XLR female connectors(110Ω, balanced).

Each XLR has its own colour, as described in the following table:

% AUD DIN Unbal

unbalanced: four BNC female connectors, compliant withSMPTE 276M (75Ω, 1V unbalanced).

AMuSE board

1 2 3 4 5 6


ShieldIN1

67

9

IN2-

IN1+

ShieldIN2IN3+

IN1-

8

101112131415

IN3-ShieldIN3

IN4-ShieldIN4IN4+

IN2+ GND

GND

GND

XLR colour Channels

brown Digital stereo (IN1-, IN1+, ShieldIN1)

red Digital stereo (IN2-, IN2+, ShieldIN2)

orange Digital stereo (IN3-, IN3+, ShieldIN3)

yellow Digital stereo (IN4-, IN4+, ShieldIN4)



& CTRL OUT Description:This interface is reserved for controlling and monitoring an external audio encoder, a Dolby AC-3 Multichannel Encoder (DP569).

Characteristics: SubD9 female connector, asynchronous, RS 485.

AMuSE board

1 2 3 4 5 6

Dolby AC-3Surround encoder

DP569

AMuSEboard

SSEBboard

Up to 3 AES3ctrl/cmd

Gen lock

IEC1937 in AES3

Ethernet

TS out

ctrl + clk

TS output

Backplane

DBE 4110 Encoder


5

RX-TX+

678

RX+TX-

GND

NC

GND

4GND 9 GND



' REF OUT Description:This interface is used to synchronise an external audio encoder. It allows the external Dolby AC-3 encoder to be locked onto the video clock.

Characteristics: generates muted PCM samples at 48 kHz, and locked onto the

video clock of the associated SSEB board, Female BNC coaxial connector, compliant with SMPTE 276M

(75Ω, 1V, unbalanced).

( LED Not relevant

AMuSE board

1 2 3 4 5 6



2.2.5 - ISMB board (slot 2)

ISMB board


# REMOTE The "REMOTE" RS485 connector is used for the control andcommand link.

Characteristics:

Female Sub-D 9-pin connector:

The cable is delivered with the device. Pay attention to the directionof this cable.

$ IF LO Characteristics: Female BNC coaxial connector, Impedance: 75Ω., Frequency : 100MHz.

1

REMOTE IF LO IF OUT L BAND OUT

2 3 4


/RX

6789 RX

TX

GND/TX



% IF OUT Characteristics: Female BNC coaxial connector, Impedance: 75Ω.

& L BAND OUT


ISMB board

1

REMOTE IF LO IF OUT L BAND OUT

2 3 4



2.2.6 - ATADI board (slot 4)

ATADI board


# AES IN Two digital audios can be input on the ATADI board, either on aSubD (balanced) or on XLR connectors (unbalanced). The choicebetween BNC and XLR is user-programmable for each audio.

Description:This connector accepts the two digital audio inputs in balanced form. A specific cable is shipped with the board. This cable links theSubD15 connector to 4 XLR female connectors (the same type ofcable as for the AMuSE board or the SSEB board) but only two XLRconnectors are used.

Characteristics: Female SubD15 connector,

Impedance: 110 Ω, Balanced.

Each XLR has its own colour, as described in the following table.

21


IN1G

67

9

IN2-

IN1+

IN2GNC

IN1-

8

101112131415

NCGND

NCGNDNC

IN2+ GND

GND

GND

XLR colour Channel

brown Digital stereo (IN1-, IN1+, IN1GND)

red Digital stereo (IN2-, IN2+, IN2GND)



$ AES IN Description:These connectors accept the two digital audio inputs in unbalancedform.

Characteristics: two 75Ω female BNC connectors, compliant with SMPTE 276 M standard (75Ω,

1V unbalanced).Left BNC input is linked to SSEB audio encoder no. 1.Right BNC input is linked to SSEB audio encoder no. 2.


ATADI board

21



2.2.7 - Alarm Relay Closure

This function is implemented by two boards:

RSMAINT board


# Coding wheel (should be set to 0 for normal operation)

$ ALARM N - T/A switch (N: normal, T/A: test-acknowledgement)

% RESET RESET pushbutton (reserved for maintenance)

& RS232 Male SubD 9 connector (reserved for maintenance)

1 2 43

15

69

0



ALARM (MSDL) board (slot 3)

# STATISTI-CALMULTI-PLEXING

SubD 9 connector (for DBE 4130 only)

$ ALARM Alarm output for remoting prompt alarms. In a system configura-tion, the alarm outputs of the different devices can be grouped by paralleling the contacts which are normally open (i.e. when there are no prompt alarms) or serialising the normally closed contacts. The configuration of the "normally open" or "normally closed" contacts depends on the setting of two switches on the alarm board.

Characteristics:SubD 9 connector

1 2


NCNC

6789

NCNC

DL1

NC

DL2

NCNC



2.2.8 - Modulator Control&Command

A 0.5m length cable is supplied with this option, N41SM0DCAH.

The two ends of the cable are different. The labels on the cable show which endshould be connected to the encoder and which to the modulator. The cable features110Ω termination resistance.


80 Chapter 22.3 - Switching on the device

2.3 - SWITCHING ON THE DEVICE

Ensure that the device is properly grounded before power-up.

On the rear panel, connect the power cable and turn the power switch to ON. Whenthe device is switched on, check that the green "POWER" LED on the front panel ison. If not, refer to the "Troubleshooting" chapter.

When switched on, the device runs an autotest after which the main screen isdisplayed (see Welcome and main screens page 108).

Caution:

When the DBE 4110 encoder is first switched on, the non volatile RAM is initialised witha configuration not defining any service. It is necessary to create or recall a service. Referto the "PC operation - Control & Command software" chapter.

When the device is switched on, the last active configuration is loaded.


Chapter 2 81 2.4 - Cable corrector in the case of a composite input

2.4 - CABLE CORRECTOR IN THE CASE OF A COMPOSITE INPUT

The cable corrector is useful for links exceeding 10m.

2.4.1 - DPSN board

Switch SE1 (in the figure of the DPSN board below) is used to adjust the FREQ.and GAIN potentiometers for cable correction. When the settings are active, thegreen "ON" LED is on and the bandwidth and the gain can be adjusted.

To adjust the cable corrector:

switch off the device, extract the board - on extraction and insertion of the board, check that the metaljoints that ensure electromagnetic continuity are correctly positioned, set the SE1 switch to 1 - in setting 2 (factory setting), the SE1 switch deactivatesthe cable corrector, insert the board, inject a multiburst signal, through the cable to be equalised, at the compositevideo input, connect a monitor to the MONITOR access on the board, increase signal amplitude to the required level with the GAIN setting, adjust the bandwidth of the cable corrector with the FREQ. setting.


82 Chapter 22.4 - Cable corrector in the case of a composite input

Figure 2.6: Part of DPSN board

2.4.2 - COMPIN board

Switches S1 and S3 (in the figure of the COMPIN board below) are used to adjustthe FREQ. and GAIN potentiometers for cable correction. When the settings areactive, the green EQ LED is on and the bandwidth and the gain can be adjusted.

To adjust the cable corrector:

switch off the device, extract the board - on extraction and insertion of the board, check that the metaljoints that ensure electromagnetic continuity are correctly positioned, set S1 and S3 switches together towards the MONITOR connector - set S1 and S3switches together towards the Composite video IN connector (factory setting), theswitches deactivate the cable corrector, insert the board,

J4J2

MA500MA520

MX1

L3L630

MA11

C695

C69

3

C691

C28

6

CR110

MA34

MN6

TP683TP682

TP681TP680

TP642

TP641TP640

TP687

TP686

TP685

TP684

MN5

H3 H1

Q18

0

Q641SE1

C600

TP10

0

TP620

TP20

TP600

TP11

C614C615

C617 C616

P1

L520

L500

L540

FL100

FL101C

702

C17

6

C52

3

C50

3

C520

C500

MN

51

MA12MN33

R71

7R709

R703

R700

C83

R71 R73

C93R77

R14

6

R62

2

R18

2R

184

C17

2R

180

R64

4

C64

1R

648

C64

2R64

9

C17

3 R17

3

R640R642R24

R609R610

R7

C7

R5

R620

R141

C111

C631

C630

C12

5

C12

0C118

C11

4C

113

C62

7

C62

6

C625

C62

4

C62

9

C628C621C620

C647

C191

C19

0

C605

C60

3C

613

C61

2

C61

1

C60

9

C607

C606

C11

9

Q640

FL1FL2

MN20

MN19

MN21

MA22

MA10

MA14MA13

MA16MA15

MA18

MA20

MA33

MA17

MA

31MA32

MA

1

MA30

MA28

MN23

MN40

MN41

MN

32

MN31

MN43

MA

2

MN37

MN8

MA37

MA36

MN26

MA7

MA8 MN22

MN2

MN53MA19

MN18

MN30MN50

MN

46

MN

15

S5

S4

S3S2

S13

S10S1

1

SE680

SE71 MA35

MN27

MN24

MN25

MN4

MA21

MN28

J1J3 P1_2

P1_1

R24

8

R16

4

R604

F520

F500

F540

L6

L1

L4

L2

L280

L170

L25

L600

TP9

TP4

TP3

TP2

TP10

TP15

TP14

TP8

R19

2

C64

3

540

C28

2

DS4

DS2

DS150

DS1

MN14

MN52

17

14

11

K

K

K

K

1 2

31

3 2

SE1

GAIN

FREQ

ON

MONITOR


Chapter 2 83 2.4 - Cable corrector in the case of a composite input

inject a multiburst signal, through the cable to be equalised, at the compositevideo input, connect a monitor to the MONITOR access on the board, increase signal amplitude to the required level with the GAIN setting, adjust the bandwidth of the cable corrector with the FREQ. setting.

Figure 2.7: Part of COMPIN board

S1/S3

FREQEQ

MONITOR

GAIN


84 Chapter 22.5 - Installing Stand-Alone software

2.5 - INSTALLING STAND-ALONE SOFTWARE

2.5.1 - Scope

The stand-alone software supplied with the encoder is designed to control a singleencoder.

The stand-alone software comprises a set of basic applications for declaring,configuring and supervising the encoder.

2.5.2 - Installation

2.5.2.1 - Environment

The software runs with Windows NT4.0 and Windows 2000 operating systems.

To run the Alarm Help and Event Log applications, the "Interbase 6" databasemanager must be installed. This manager is included in the "Stand-Alone" softwareand can be installed when the "Stand-Alone" software itself is first installed.

Note: with WINDOWS NT or WINDOWS 2000 operating systems, "Administrator"rights are needed to install the database manager.

Minimum requirements for the PC designated to support the software are:

300 MHz Pentium II© microprocessor, WINDOWS NT version 4 or WINDOWS 2000 operating system, ETHERNET© board, TCP/IP command interface (MicroSoft TCP/IP-32©), mouse, colour monitor with 17" screen, SVGA resolution (800 x 600).

Note: release 7.0 of the software requires a system library (comctl32.dll) which may not beup-to-date on certain Windows NT 4.0 versions (in particular on service pack 3 withInternet Explorer 3). The software installation program tests the version number of this library and offers to


Chapter 2 85 2.5 - Installing Stand-Alone software

install a Microsoft patch to correct the problem. "Administrator" rights and a PC reboot are needed to install this patch.

2.5.2.2 - Interface language for the applications

The interface language of the Alarm Help application corresponds to the onechosen in the Windows Control Panel (Regional Settings WinNT or RegionalOptions Win2000) before installation, i.e. French for French-speaking countries andEnglish for the others.

For the other applications, French and English will be installed systematically andthe required language can be chosen using the Regional Settings application in theWindows Control Panel.

Figure 2.8: Regional Settings (WinNT) or Regional Options (Win 2000)

2.5.2.3 - Setup procedure

The software is supplied on CD-ROM.

1. Insert the CD-ROM in the PC drive.

2. Double-click on the Setup.exe file in the Stand-Alone/Disk1 directory to begininstalling the software. The Wizard is then loaded to help you install the



software.

Figure 2.9: Loading the Wizard

3. If release 7.0 of the "Stand-Alone" software is being installed on the PC for thefirst time and the user rights are not "Administator", the following window isdisplayed:

Clicking on OK displays the following dialogue box.

Clicking on OK displays Figure 2.22: "Stand-Alone" software setup complete. Thesoftware has not been installed.

4. If release 7.0 of the "Stand-Alone" software has already been installed or thePC user rights are "Administrator", the first dialogue box displayed is used toselect a software installation directory. A default directory is proposed.



Figure 2.10: Default directory

5. To choose another directory, click on Browse and indicate the directory andthe path (e.g., c:\dvb\dbs2930v6.5\V65program).

Figure 2.11: Changing directories



6. If the directory does not already exist, confirm whether or not you want it tobe created.

Figure 2.12: Creating a new directory

Figure 2.13: New directory

7. Click on Next>.

8. The following dialogue box is used to validate DBS 2930 software options.This dialogue box is not used in Stand-Alone mode.



Figure 2.14: Validating DBS 2930 options

9. Do not fill in this window and click on Next.

10.A new dialogue box is displayed. It is used to rename the directory in theProgram Folder which contains the icons representing the various softwareapplications. Both the icons and this directory are automatically generatedduring the software setup phase.



Figure 2.15: Icon directory

11.Click on Next>.

Setup is run (file loading and icon creation).

Figure 2.16: Running setup

12.When setup is complete and if the database manager has already beeninstalled, Figure 2.22: "Stand-Alone" software setup complete is displayed. Ifversion 7.0 of the software is being installed on the PC for the first time, the



"Interbase" database manager installation initialisation window is displayed.

Figure 2.17: Initialising database manager installation

The following window is then displayed:

Figure 2.18: Database manager welcome screen

13.Click on Next to display the database manager user licence agreement screen.



Figure 2.19: Licence agreement

14.Read the contents of the licence and click on I Agree to begin installing themanager.

Figure 2.20: Installing the database manager

The following window is displayed to show that setup is complete:



Figure 2.21: Database manager setup complete

15.Click on Finish to display the "Stand-Alone" software setup completewindow.

Figure 2.22: "Stand-Alone" software setup complete

16.Click on Finish to exit "Stand-Alone" software setup.



Figure 2.23: Installation directory contents

Figure 2.24: Software application icons



2.5.3 - Running the software

After running WINDOWS on the operating PC and opening the directorycontaining the software applications, the following panel is displayed:

Figure 2.25: Icon display

The icons represent the Stand-Alone software applications.

The following order must be observed when running the software:

1. Open a session by double-clicking on the Equipment Interface icon to run theEquipment Interface application.

2. Declare the device from the Equipment Installation application. This stepis unnecessary if the device has already been declared in a previous session.

3. Set the technical configuration of the device from the TechnicalConfiguration application. This step is unnecessary if the device has alreadybeen set in a previous session.

4. Run the Monitoring & Redundancy application to monitor the device.

5. The Event Log application is used to view events occurring on the Encoder(alarms, reboot, etc.).

6. The Alarm Help application explains the meaning of alarms displayed in

Notes:1. To shut down a session, it is advisable to close this application after all the others,otherwise a "Some Applications are still connected; Do you really want to quitanyway?" warning message will ask you to confirm application shut down.2. It is advisable to leave this application open when the device is being used, even ifno other application is run.



the Monitoring & Redundancy application.

Notes:1. The Download Embedded Software application is used by NEXTREAM todownload embedded software.2. The ATM Connect Management application does not concern the DBE 4130Encoder/ADSL SuperEncoder.


Chapter 2 97 2.6 - Installing optional boards

2.6 - INSTALLING OPTIONAL BOARDS

2.6.1 - Installing a board

Figure 2.26: DBE 4110 rear panel

Switch off the device. Remove the blank panel. Carefully slide in the board whilst keeping the extractors open. When the board is nearly all the way in, start closing the extractors by pushing

them towards the centre of the board. Check that the metal joins that ensureelectromagnetic continuity are correctly positioned and that the centring pinsare aligned with the centring holes. Press gently to engage the connectors.

When the board is completely inserted, secure it with the screws. Switch the device on. To change the hardware configuration, switch to "local" mode in the

OTHER/Tools/Control menu on the front panel. Declare the board via the DBE 4110s front panel

("OTHER/Tools/Option/Hardware" menu). Reboot the device.

Note: A 2TE blank panel is delivered with the 4TE AMuSE board to fill 6TE slot 2.

COMPIN or DPSN (option)

SSEB (standard)

AMuSE or ISMB (option) + blank panel,Alarm Relay Closure

ATADI (option)

(option) see note


98 Chapter 22.6 - Installing optional boards

2.6.2 - Removing the board

Switch off the device. Follow the installation procedure in reverse order. Undeclare the board via the DBE 4110s front panel.

Note: A blank panel must be set in the empty slot.


Chapter 2 99 2.7 - Installing software options

2.7 - INSTALLING SOFTWARE OPTIONS

If the options are delivered with the device, they are directly available for theoperator without operation.

If you order the options after device purchase, please follow the procedure below:

When you order an option, please supply your device code (see section3.8.9.3.6 - OTHER / Tools / About screen page 146),

NEXTREAM will return you a special 6-digit key (which is unique and canonly be used for one device) and a sticker to stick on the device,

To install the option, enter this key (see section 3.8.9.3.5 - OTHER / Tools /Option screen page 143).

Note: It is necessary to close and open the Technical Configuration application when anew software option is installed.


100 Chapter 22.7 - Installing software options

BLANK PAGE


Chapter 3 - Front Panel Operation 101

Chapter 3Front Panel Operation

3.1 - Operating principle ............................................................................ 103

3.2 - Front panel overview ......................................................................... 104

3.3 - Welcome and main screens .............................................................. 108

3.4 - Ergonomy............................................................................................ 1103.4.1 - Operating mode............................................................................ 1103.4.2 - Changing parameters ON AIR...................................................... 112

3.5 - External modulator connection ........................................................ 113

3.6 - Menu tree ............................................................................................ 114

3.7 - Sections associated with the menu.................................................. 117

3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens........................... 1183.8.1 - Main screen .................................................................................. 1183.8.2 - TRANSMIT screen........................................................................ 1193.8.3 - PRESET screen............................................................................ 120

3.8.3.1 - PRESET / Recall screen.............................................................. 1203.8.3.2 - PRESET / Store screen ............................................................... 1223.8.3.3 - PRESET / Erase screen .............................................................. 123

3.8.4 - MOD.SETUP screen..................................................................... 1243.8.4.1 - MOD.SETUP / Tx O/P screen...................................................... 1243.8.4.2 - MOD.SETUP / If screen............................................................... 1253.8.4.3 - MOD.SETUP / L-Band screen ..................................................... 1263.8.4.4 - MOD.SETUP / Convolution screen.............................................. 1273.8.4.5 - MOD.SETUP / Symbol_R screen ................................................ 1273.8.4.6 - MOD.SETUP / Info/Bandwidth screen ......................................... 1283.8.4.7 - MOD.SETUP / Roll_off screen..................................................... 1293.8.4.8 - MOD.SETUP / Spectrum screen ................................................. 130

3.8.5 - ENC.O/P screen ........................................................................... 1303.8.6 - ENCODING screen....................................................................... 131

3.8.6.1 - ENCODING / Video screen.......................................................... 131


102 Chapter 3 - Front Panel Operation

3.8.6.2 - ENCODING / Audio screen .......................................................... 1333.8.6.3 - ENCODING / Data screen............................................................ 134

3.8.7 - SCRAMBLING screen.................................................................. 1353.8.8 - ALARM screen ............................................................................. 1363.8.9 - OTHER screen ............................................................................. 137

3.8.9.1 - OTHER / Setup screen................................................................. 1373.8.9.2 - OTHER / Monitor screen .............................................................. 138

3.8.9.2.1 - OTHER / Monitor / Output screen ............................................... 1383.8.9.2.2 - OTHER / Monitor / Input screen .................................................. 139

3.8.9.3 - OTHER / Tools screen ................................................................. 1413.8.9.3.1 - OTHER / Tools / Control screen.................................................. 1413.8.9.3.2 - OTHER / Tools / IP Address screen............................................ 1413.8.9.3.4 - OTHER / Tools / Reboot screen.................................................. 1433.8.9.3.5 - OTHER / Tools / Option screen................................................... 1433.8.9.3.6 - OTHER / Tools / About screen.................................................... 1463.8.9.3.7 - OTHER / Tools / Time screen ..................................................... 148


Chapter 3 103 3.1 - Operating principle

3.1 - OPERATING PRINCIPLE

In stand-alone configuration, supervision is carried out from the front panel(described in this chapter) and from a PC terminal connected to the DBE 4110 by anEthernet link and equipped with "Stand-alone" software supplied with theequipment (described in the following chapter) or Fast DSNG software (describedin the chapter immediately afterwards). Front panel operation is designed to takeinto consideration the operating conditions of DSNG operators (Service Providersusing the device for straightforward event coverage or the more complex occasionallinks).

The following sections describe the control / command menu tree of the DSNGDBE 4110 encoder.

Caution: When a parameter is changed by the supervision applications, the front paneldisplay is not updated, it is necessary to validate the parameters.

47232437AK01 THOMSOM DBE 4110June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

104 Chapter 33.2 - Front panel overview

3.2 - FRONT PANEL OVERVIEW

The front panel has two operating modes, supported by a specific software process,REMOTE and LOCAL. In REMOTE mode, only access to DBE 4110 state isavailable, and no changes may be made to operation. In LOCAL mode, the operatorhas full control over signal transmission and compression parameters. The modechanging procedure is explained in 3.4 - Ergonomy.

The front panel has an LCD, five function keys and a set of 4 LEDs.

DBE 4110 front panel

MPEG-2DBE 4110DVB

ESC

ENT

SHIFT

THOMSOM DBE 4110 47232437AK01MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003

Chapter 3 105 3.2 - Front panel overview

LEDs

The LEDs provide a visual indication of the operating state and/or settings of theequipment. They are interpreted as follows:

Keypad

LED COLOUR DESCRIPTION

POWER green Device on

UNIT FAIL red Prompt alarm preventing operation

WARNING orange Deferred alarm not preventing operation or initialisation phase

REMOTE green Remote mode selected andcontrol/command session by a remote operating unit

ESC

ENT

SHIFT


106 Chapter 33.2 - Front panel overview

Key functions are as follows:

Note:The SHIFT and ENT keys cannot be used to select the IP address.

A beep sounds if the user makes keystroke errors or enters erroneous values:

ENT: BEEP if the editing mode is not allowed.

⇐ : BEEP if no previous choice.

⇒: BEEP if no further choice.

LCD presentation:

The LCD features 4 lines of 40 characters each.

First line: displays the menu level,

when followed by "/" - displays the current sub-menu level and sub-menu of theparameters displayed below.

when followed by ":" - current parameter value of associated menu item isdisplayed.

Second line: displays various messages (blank, question, parameter, etc.).

KEYS FUNCTION

ESC Ignore modifications or go back to menu above

⇐ Move cursor left, or upwards in a list

⇒ Move cursor right or downwards in a list

ENT Select item, increment alphanumeric value of a digit when bracketed and save changes

SHIFT and ENT Select a digit, decrement alphanumeric value of the digit when bracketed

ENT and ⇐ or ⇒ Enhance or reduce LCD contrast


Chapter 3 107 3.2 - Front panel overview

Third line: displays menu item or new value to be selected and entered

Or, at sub-menu level, displays one item with its current value

Fourth line:

at menu level: menu item, using the SHIFT key and moving the cursor

at sub-menu level: displays one item with its current value

on editing page: context-sensitive help (e.g. parameter range) or error message

Menu tree navigation and editing principle

The symbols guide operation and the markers help to locate and/or select displayed items.

SYMBOL INDICATION

........ selection cursor moved with left/right arrow keys

selection pointer moved with left/right arrow keys to move up and down menus, then press ENT for editing menu

fixed marker for upward extension of menu/parameter list

fixed marker for downward extension of menu/parameter list


108 Chapter 33.3 - Welcome and main screens

3.3 - WELCOME AND MAIN SCREENS

When the DBE 4110 is switched on, the following screen is displayed:

This is followed by the main screens:

- the start menu:

The selection cursor ... moves with the ⇐ and ⇒ keys on the third and thefourth lines.

Press the ENT key on the keypad to select the required command, then the relevantsub-menu is displayed.

*** Basic system check . . . OK*** Bootstrap version 2.45 - 16-Dec-99

(32768 Kbytes DRAM installed)(c) 1999 - THOMSON BROADCAST SYSTEMS

Figure 1: Welcome screen

*** Autotest in progress ***

/ Root :

Transmit Preset Mod.Setup Enc.O/P

Encoding Scrambling Alarm OtherFigure 2: Main screen


Chapter 3 109 3.3 - Welcome and main screens

- the default window:

After a reboot, the LCD displays a default window, which gives the configurationparameters.

Note:The default screen displays 0.032 Mb/s even if no video component is generated.The station name field directly refers to the service name.

Press ESC to switch between the start menu and the default window.After 3 minutes without any action on the keypad, the start menu automatically goes back to the default window.

There are several warning windows: when the operator wants to quit a screen without saving or wants to confirm saving.

When "ALARM" flashes press ENT for direct access to the "Alarm" menu, then ESC to return to the initial state to correct the source of any alarms.

/ [station name] MOD OFF NON INVERTED

6.11132 Ms / s QPSK 3/4 204

PAL 420 0.032000 Mb / s ALARM

A1 - OFF A2 - OFF IF 70.000 MHz FREE


110 Chapter 33.4 - Ergonomy

3.4 - ERGONOMY

3.4.1 - Operating mode

The functions available on the front panel vary according to the type of connectionwhich may be a LOCAL connection (both consult and modify operations areauthorised) or a REMOTE connection (only consult mode is authorised).

To change operating modes (to change from REMOTE mode to LOCAL mode orvice versa), proceed as follows:

1. Go to the start menu (press ESC).

The LCD screen offers the following options

2. Press the ⇒ or ⇐ key, move the cursor to the Other field, then press the ENT key.The following screen appears:

3. Select the Tools field, then press the ENT key.

/ Root :


Encoding Scrambling Alarm Other

Root / Other :

Setup Monitor Tools

Other / Tools :


Chapter 3 111 3.4 - Ergonomy

4. The cursor will be on the CONTROL field, press ENT.

The first line features the current value (in this case LOCAL mode).

To change the value, click on the ⇒ key. The choice of mode is LOCAL orREMOTE.

Click on the ENT key. The following screen appears:

For confirmation, press the ENT key.

For cancellation, press the ESC key.

Press the ESC key:

Go back to the Control screen.

Control Ip Address Reboot Option

About Time

Tools / Control : LOCAL

Control : LOCAL

Switch to local mode

ARE YOU SURE?

(ENT) = YES (ESC) = NO

EXIT WITHOUT SAVING



112 Chapter 33.4 - Ergonomy

3.4.2 - Changing parameters ON AIR

The encoder has a transmission interrupt/restore mechanism in the event of aparameter change On Air. If you edit essential transmission parameters On Airtransmission is stopped. Information is displayed on the warning screen.


Chapter 3 113 3.5 - External modulator connection

3.5 - EXTERNAL MODULATOR CONNECTION

When an external modulator is connected, IF access is available and it is possible tocontrol RF depending on the output modulator (IF, L, Ku, C). The possible levelrange is -35 to -5 dBm.


114 Chapter 33.6 - Menu tree

3.6 - MENU TREE

The following page illustrates the menu tree with all the options.


Chapter 3 115 3.6 - Menu tree

THOMSON DBE 4110

MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

TOOLS

OTHER

CONTROL

IP ADDRESS

REBOOT

OPTION

ABOUT

TIME

BLING ALARM

SETUP MONITOR

ASI I/P

S_ID

FRAMING

ATION NAME

MSDL

INPUT

OUTPUT

47232437AK01June 2003

TRANSMIT

MAIN

MOD.SETUP ENCODINGPRESET ENC.O/P SCRAM

RECALL

STORE

ERASE L-BAND

IF

TX O/P

SYMBOL_R

INFO.BNDWDTH

ROLL_OFF

SPECTRUM

VIDEO

AUDIO

DATA

ST

CONVOLUTION

IF

L-Band

IF Freq

Low Level

Nom Level

L-Band

Low Level

Nom Level

Osc Band

C/Ku Freq

116 Chapter 3

3.6 - Menu tree

47232437AK01June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual

BLANK PAGE

Chapter 3 117 3.7 - Sections associated with the menu

3.7 - SECTIONS ASSOCIATED WITH THE MENU

3.8.2 - TRANSMIT screen

3.8.3 - PRESET screen 3.8.3.1 - PRESET / Recall screen3.8.3.2 - PRESET / Store screen3.8.3.3 - PRESET / Erase screen

3.8.4 - MOD.SETUP screen 3.8.4.1 - MOD.SETUP / Tx O/P screen3.8.4.2 - MOD.SETUP / If screen3.8.4.3 - MOD.SETUP / L-Band screen3.8.4.4 - MOD.SETUP / Convolution screen3.8.4.5 - MOD.SETUP / Symbol_R screen3.8.4.6 - MOD.SETUP / Info/Bandwidth screen3.8.4.7 - MOD.SETUP / Roll_off screen3.8.4.8 - MOD.SETUP / Spectrum screen

3.8.5 - ENC.O/P screen

3.8.6 - ENCODING screen 3.8.6.1 - ENCODING / Video screen3.8.6.2 - ENCODING / Audio screen3.8.6.3 - ENCODING / Data screen

3.8.7 - SCRAMBLING screen

3.8.8 - ALARM screen List of alarms

3.8.9 - OTHER screen 3.8.9.1 - OTHER / Setup screen3.8.9.2 - OTHER / Monitor screen

3.8.9.2.1 - OTHER / Monitor / Output screen3.8.9.2.2 - OTHER / Monitor / Input screen

3.8.9.3 - OTHER / Tools screen3.8.9.3.1 - OTHER / Tools / Control screen3.8.9.3.2 - OTHER / Tools / IP Address screen3.8.9.3.4 - OTHER / Tools / Reboot screen3.8.9.3.5 - OTHER / Tools / Option screen3.8.9.3.6 - OTHER / Tools / About screen3.8.9.3.7 - OTHER / Tools / Time screen


118 Chapter 3 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens

3.8 - DESCRIPTION OF THE MENU AND ASSOCIATED SCREENS

3.8.1 - Main screen

When the cursor is placed on the last parameter Other, a beep is emitted. Bypressing the right arrow key, the cursor goes back to the Transmit parameter.

Otherwise, the left arrow key takes the cursor back to Alarm, Scrambling, etc.

/ Root :


Encoding Scrambling Alarm Other


Chapter 3 119 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens

3.8.2 - TRANSMIT screen

In the main screen, select the TRANSMIT field and press the ENT key. The TRANSMIT menu appears:

The TRANSMIT menu offers the option between CARRIER OFF, PURECARRIER LOW LEVEL, PURE CARRIER NOM LEVEL and MODULATIONON by clicking with the right/left arrow key.

Note: In the IF area between the selection cursor, only one value is displayed at a time,you can search within the list by pressing the right or left arrow keys as many times asnecessary.

For a PURE CARRIER LOW LEVEL transmission, the range level is -25.0 to-5dBm in 0.5 steps. When PURE CARRIER LOW LEVEL is selected, press ENTto set the low level then ENT to validate.

For a PURE CARRIER NOM LEVEL transmission, the range level is the same.

When the MODULATION ON is selected, press ENT to adjust the nominal level,then ENT to validate.

In any case, the values are updated in the Mod.Setup menu.

Select the parameter in the IF area.The scrolling order is: CARRIER OFF, PURE CARRIER LOW LEVEL,PURE CARRIER NOM LEVEL, MODULATION ON.

Press the ENT key.

Caution: No operator acknowledgement is requested.

Note: Whatever the modulator state is, before rebooting, it will be CARRIER OFF whenthe unit is switched on again.

Transmit / IF: CARRIER OFF

IF : CARRIER OFF

The output is disabled



3.8.3 - PRESET screen

In the main screen, select the PRESET field and press the ENT key.

The menu offers the possibility of recalling configurations, storing newconfigurations and erasing configurations.

3.8.3.1 - PRESET / Recall screen

In the PRESET screen, select the Recall field and press the ENT key.

By clicking on the right arrow key, you can select the required configuration.Eight user configurations are available, plus 3 factory-installed configurations(A, B, C). All the characteristics of these configurations are described in thefollowing table:

Root / Preset :

Recall Store Erase

Preset / Recall :

A : SNG-LBR

B : SNG-HBR

C : LBR+DATA

1

8

: configuration name_1

: configuration name_8



A B C

SERVICE Service ID 100 100 100

PMT PID 257 257 257

PCR PID 100 100 100

Type Digital TV Service (1)

Digital TV Service (1)


Name TV TV TV

Provider name None None None

Scrambling Clear mode Clear mode Clear mode

VIDEO Profile 4:2:0 MP@ML 4:2:2 P@ML 4:2:2 P@ML

PID 100 100 100

Bit Rate 7.6Mbit/s 20Mbit/s 9Mbit/s

Coding No low delay No low delay No low delay

Source SDI SDI SDI

Resolution 720x576 720x576 720x576

GOP 12 12 12

IP frame 3 3 3

Aspect ratio 4/3 4/3 4/3

AUDIO1&2 Input Analogue Analogue Analogue

PID audio 1 110 110 110

PID audio 2 111 111 111

Bit rate 256kbit/s 384kbit/s 384kbit/s

Mode Stereo Stereo Stereo

Coding MPEG1 Layer 2 MPEG1 Layer 2 MPEG1 Layer 2

DATA PID Not used Not used 103

Baud rate Not used Not used 9600

Stream type Not used Not used 0x80

TRANSMISSION Symbol rate 6.111Ms/s 23.333Ms/s 6.666Ms/s

Modulation QPSK QPSK QPSK

Code rate 3/4 7/8 7/8

Roll Off Auto Auto Auto

Level -15dBm -15dBm -15dBm

Output Off Air Off Air Off Air

Spectral inversion Off Off Off

Packet size 204 204 204

IF frequency 70MHz 70MHz 70MHz

L-Band 1140.0MHz 1140.0MHz 1140.0MHz



All other parameters are not saved or recalled.

Note: If the N41S422P option is not implemented, the predefined configuration"SNG-HBR" is not available. This is also the case with option N41SD56K - RS232 -regarding the LBR+DATA configuration.

Select the required configuration and press the ENT key.

3.8.3.2 - PRESET / Store screen

In the PRESET screen, select the Store field and press the ENT key.

Press the ENT key. The following screen appears to enter the configuration name.

The name of a new configuration is composed of 16 digits.

The operator modifies digits one by one by pressing ENT to increment the valuethen moving the cursor with the right arrow key to go to the next character. Thenplace the cursor on the SAVE command and press the ENT key.

Up to 8 user configurations can be stored.

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX is an alphanumeric character string. The charactersallowed are: A...Z and 0, 1...9 plus some other characters (-, :, blank).

Preset / Store :

1 : configuration name



Preset / Store/1 :

NEW : X X X X X X X SAVE

info:



3.8.3.3 - PRESET / Erase screen

In the PRESET screen, select the Erase field and press the ENT key.

Press ENT on the selected configuration to be removed, confirmation will berequested.

Press ENT, configuration is acknowledged, then back to Preset menu. Press ESC, configuration is cancelled, then back to Preset menu.

Note: It is not possible to erase preset configurations A, B and C. They are not displayedon this screen.

Preset / Erase:




ARE YOU SURE?




3.8.4 - MOD.SETUP screen

In the main menu, select the Mod.Setup field and press the ENT key. The followingscreen appears:

3.8.4.1 - MOD.SETUP / Tx O/P screen

In the Mod.Setup screen, select the Tx O/P field and press the ENT key.

The current value is given on the first line. The Tx O/P area allows the operator tochoose between the values IF and L-Band using the ⇒ and ⇐ keys, then by pressingENT the new value is taken into account and the first line is updated.

Root / Mod.Setup:

Tx O/P : IF

If : CARRIER OFF

L-Band : UNUSED

ConvolutionSymbol RInfo BndwdthRoll OffSpectrum

: QPSK 7/8: 06.666571 Ms/s: 08.99987 MHz: AUTOMATIC: NON INVERTED

Mod.Setup /Tx O/P: IF

Tx O/P: IF



3.8.4.2 - MOD.SETUP / If screen

In the Mod.Setup screen select the If field and press the ENT key.

Press ENT.

Press ENT to increment the value in the NEW field. The range is from 0-9. PressSAVE once the value has been obtained. No confirmation is requested. If the valuerequested falls outside the range specified on the fourth line info, the message"incorrect value" is displayed and no change is made.

To change the Low Level or Nom Level parameter press ENT on the requiredoption. The current level will be displayed on the first line and can be changed in0.5 steps on line 3 using the ⇒ (higher) and ⇐ (lower) keys. The lowest possiblevalue for both Low Level and Nom Level is -25.0 (max. 05.0 dBm). A beep soundswhen an unauthorised value is requested. The two screens are as follows:

Mod.Setup /If:

IF Freq : 00070.000 MHz

Low Level : -25.0

Nom Level : -10.0

IF / IF Freq:

NEW : X X . X X X X X X Ms/s SAVE

info : 50-180 MHz

IF Low/Level: -25.0

Level: -25.0



3.8.4.3 - MOD.SETUP / L-Band screen

In the Mod.Setup screen, select the L-Band field and press the ENT key.

F can be set in 1 kHz steps.

The level range is: -20 dBm - +5.0 dBm.

Press ENT.

IF Nominal/Level: -10.0

Level: -10.0

Mod.Setup /L-Band:

L-Band Freq : 1140.000 MHz

Low Level : -25.0

Nom Level : -10.0

Osc. bandOsc. value

: none / c / ku: non / c / ku

L-Band / L-Band Freq:


info : 950-1750 MHz



For details on Low Level and Nom Level value editing, saving and ranges refer tosection 3.8.4.2 - MOD.SETUP / If screen.

3.8.4.4 - MOD.SETUP / Convolution screen

In the Mod.Setup screen, select the Convolution field and press the ENT key.

The current value is given on the first line.

The operator can choose between the different values in the following list,depending on modulator capabilities:

QPSK 1/2, QPSK 2/3, QPSK 3/4, QPSK 5/6, QPSK 7/8, 8PSK 2/3, 8PSK 5/6,8PSK 8/9, 16QAM3/4, 16QAM7/8, in compliance with EN 300421 standard "DigitalVideo Broadcasting (DVB); Framing structure, channel coding and modulation for11/12GHz satellite services".

The operator can tune the Convolution parameter by pressing the ⇒ and ⇐ keys.When the value is chosen, press ENT, the first line is updated.

3.8.4.5 - MOD.SETUP / Symbol_R screen

In the Mod.Setup screen, select the Symbol_R field and press the ENT key.

The digit to be modified is highlighted. The sign can be moved with the leftand right arrow key.

Mod.Setup / Convolution : QPSK 3/4

Convolution : QPSK 3/4

Mod.Setup / Symbol Rate :


info : Max=16.000 Ms/s



To increment the digit value, press the ENT key until the required value hasbeen reached. Constant pressing may speed up the process up to 3 charactersper second.

To save the new value, move the cursor to SAVE and press ENT. The currentvalue is automatically updated.

Should the operator press the ESC key after editing (even without pressingSAVE), a warning window is displayed.

Case of choosing YES: no change occurs, the Mod.Setup is displayed.

Case of choosing NO: The symbol-rate editing screen is displayed.

Note: The Info/Bandwidth field is updated accordingly - as well as the encoder outputbitrate audio and video rate on relevant control menus.

3.8.4.6 - MOD.SETUP / Info/Bandwidth screen

In the Mod.Setup screen, select the Info/Bndwdth screen and press the ENT key. Abeep is emitted and the screen remains unchanged:

This screen is displayed for information. No editing is allowed. The bandwidthvalue is computed according to the Symbol_rate value and the relevant Roll_offfactor.

EXIT WITHOUT SAVING


Root/Mod. Setup :

Symbol R : 06.666571 Ms/sInfo Bndwdth : 08.99987 MHz

Roll Off : AUTOMATIC



3.8.4.7 - MOD.SETUP / Roll_off screen

In the Mod.Setup screen, select the Roll_off field and press the ENT key.

The Roll_off can be selected by pressing the ⇒ and ⇐ keys. The possible values are26, 35 or AUTOMATIC. Press the ENT key to validate.

Notes: The Info/Bandwidth value is internally computed according to the Symbol_rate and theRoll_off values.Roll-off values are in accordance with EN301210 standard "Digital Video Broadcast(DVB); Framing structure, channel coding and modulation for Digital SatelliteNews Gathering (DSNG) and other contribution applications by satellite"QPSK + 35%,8PSK + AUTO or 26% (default) or 35%,16QAM + 26%.

Mod.Setup / Roll Off : AUTOMATIC

Roll Off: AUTOMATIC



3.8.4.8 - MOD.SETUP / Spectrum screen

In the Mod.Setup screen, select the Spectrum field and press the ENT key.

The possible values are INVERTED or NON INVERTED.

3.8.5 - ENC.O/P screen

In the main menu, select the Enc.Output field and press the ENT key.

This screen may be used for setting the output encoder frequency/TS rate. If a valueabove the max specified value is entered, the "incorrect value" message isdisplayed.

If the hardware modulator option is set, this screen is available for information only.

Mod.Setup / Spectrum : NON INVERTED

Spectrum: NON INVERTED

Root / Enc.Output :

NEW : X X . X X X X X X Mb/s SAVE

info : Max=28.000 Mb/s



3.8.6 - ENCODING screen

In the main screen, select the Encoding field and press the ENT key.

The data and AMuSE items are displayed if related options are available in thedevice.

Select the required component and press the ENT key. Or press ESC if no change and exit to previous menu level.

3.8.6.1 - ENCODING / Video screen

In the Encoding screen, select the Video field and press the ENT key.

Select the required parameter and press the ENT key.

Root / Encoding :

VID_1 AUD_1 AUD_2 SER_1

Encoding / Video

Status : Enable

Source: Digital serial 50Hz

Profile: 420 MP@ML

Rate / Auto:Vid_Rate:Latency:Resolution:PID:

Yes 07.00000 Mb/sNORMAL - GOP 12/3720X5760100



Note: For the Rate/Auto parameter, the default value is "YES". It should be set to "NO" ifusing the ASI TS input option (N41STSIN) or RS232 option (N41SD56K).

Select ENT to validate your choice or select ESC to cancel changes.

Parameters Available choices

Status Enable or disable

Source Digital serial 50Hz, Digital serial 60Hz, Pattern 50Hz, Pattern 60Hz, Composite PAL BDGHI, Composite SECAM, Composite NTSC-M 60Hz

Profile 420MP@ML or 422P@ML (option)

Rate / Auto Yes or No

Vid_rate from 0.5 to 15Mb/s in MP@MLfrom 0.5 to 50Mb/s in 422P@ML

Latency Normal - GOP 12/3, Normal - GOP 15/3, Low - GOP 12/1, Low - GOP 8/1, Ultra low (I frame, only)

Resolution 720x576, 704x576, 544x576, 480x576, 352x576, 352x288

PID Within the range 32 - 8190



3.8.6.2 - ENCODING / Audio screen

In the ENCODING screen, select the Audio field (e.g. AUD_1 or AUD_2) thenpress the ENT key.

Encoding / Audio1/2:

Status : Enable

Source : AnalogMode / Rate : Stereo 256kbits

HeadroomAlignmentPid

: 20 dB: 4 dBu: 0110



Source Analog, Tone, Unbalanced,Balanced, SDI

Mode / Rate Mono 64, 96, 128 KbitsDual 128, 192, 256, 384 Kbits

Stereo 128, 192, 256, 384 KbitsJoint 128, 192, 256, 384 Kbits

Headroom 8 - 20 dB, in 1dB steps

Alignment 0 - 4 dBu, in 1dBu steps

PID Within the range 32 - 8190



Note:

Mode / Rate modification automatically causes Video_rate adjustment. The Headroom and Alignment parameters can be changed if the analog audio is

selected.

3.8.6.3 - ENCODING / Data screen

In the ENCODING screen, select the Data field (e.g. SER_1) and press the ENTkey.

There is only one screen for the data parameters.

This screen is proposed if the Data injection option (N41SD56K) is enabled.

Encoding / Data /

Status : Enable

Transfer : 9600

PID : 0103



Transfer 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 bauds

PID Within the range 0 - 8190, excluding PCR, video, audio PIDs used in the locally generated service.



3.8.7 - SCRAMBLING screen

In the main menu, select the Scrambling field and press the ENT key.

This mode is in compliance with the BISS standard set out in the reference documentEBU / Tech.3290 "Basic Interoperable Scrambling System (BISS)". Press ENT.

If no Mode_1 is active, the current mode value is NONE.

To modify the Session word, the Status must be set to "enable" and the DVBScrambling/BISS option must be declared.

Root / Scrambling :

BISS MODE_1

Scrambling / Mode 1 :

Status : Disable

Session word: 15.34.56.23.45.67



3.8.8 - ALARM screen

In the main menu, select the ALARM screen and press the ENT key.

A distinction is made between prompt and deferred alarms. You can move up anddown the alarm list with the left and right arrow keys.

- first line: number of alarms- second line: only one alarm is described in the screen. This line gives the

number of one alarm.- third line: the cause of the alarm.- fourth line: the following alarm.

Note: Should an alarm occur, "ALARM" flashes in the default window.

ALARM / 5 Alarms :

17 / 519

[SSEB / AUD2] : right signal under -65dBFS

34 / 0



3.8.9 - OTHER screen

In the main menu, select the Other field and press the ENT key.

3.8.9.1 - OTHER / Setup screen

In the Other screen, select the Setup field and press the ENT key.

ASI input: If this parameter is enabled, it is no longer possible to auto-adjust thevideo rate on the remultiplexing unit.

Root / Other :

Setup Monitor Tools

Other / Setup :

Asi I/P S Id Framing Station Name

Msdl


ASI Input Disable or enable

S-Id Service name and PID (5 digits)

Framing 188 or 204

Station name 8 digits

Msdl disabled (beep)



Station name: The parameter is sent in the TSDT table. The name is also displayedon the front panel at upper menu level. It is mapped into the service name.

Framing: When changing MPEG framing, the Symbol_rate is not affected, but therelevant output clock rate is computed.

3.8.9.2 - OTHER / Monitor screen

In the Other screen, select the Monitor field and press the ENT key.

This consultation menu indicates the bitrate, the source and the mode for eachoutput video and audio component.

3.8.9.2.1 - OTHER / Monitor / Output screen

Select the Output field, then press ENT to obtain the services of the TS output.

Press ENT to get the components of the selected service.

CONTEXT:

Output Input

(ENT) : Output signal

CONTEXT:/Output /

Output flow : 4136 kb/s

TV: 100

Service flow : 4639kb/s



3.8.9.2.2 - OTHER / Monitor / Input screen

The service is visible when ASI I/P is "enabled". In addition PID conflictmanagement is supported.

Go back to the MONITOR screen, then select the Input field.

Press ENT to get the services of the selected TS input.

Press ENT to get the components of the selected service.

CONTEXT:/Output / TV : 100

Service flow (TV : 100) : 4639kb/s

AUD:110 AUD :111 VID:100 SER:768

Component flow : 4107kb/s

CONTEXT:/Input /

IN1

(ENT) : Input services

CONTEXT:/Input / IN1

COD3: TV41 COD3: TV42

Service flow : 406 kb/s



CONTEXT: /. . . /Input / IN1 / COD3 TV41

Service flow (TV : 100) : 583 kb/s

VID:1000 AUD :1001 AUD : 1002

Component flow : 204 kb/s



3.8.9.3 - OTHER / Tools screen

In the Other screen, select the Tools field and press the ENT key.

3.8.9.3.1 - OTHER / Tools / Control screen

The Control menu is already described in section 3.4 - Ergonomy.

3.8.9.3.2 - OTHER / Tools / IP Address screen

The IP address defines the device address for the control&command network. ThisTCP/IP protocol network is connected via the Ethernet connector on the device rearpanel. In Local mode, it is possible to change the IP Address, IP Netmask and IPGateway via the encoder front panel.

In the Tools screen, select the field to be changed and press ENT.

Example: changing the IP address:

Once you have selected IP Address:

Other / Tools :

Control Ip Address Reboot Option

About Time

Tools / IP Address:

IP Address IP Netmask IP Gateway



Each digit is changed individually. After rebooting, the device takes this newaddress into account.

The IP address and IP netmask or default gateway parameters can also be changedusing the Telnet application. See section Commands available with the Telnetapplication page 390

Figure 3: Modification of Addresses

IP Address / IP Address :

NEW : 172.016.010.185 SAVE

info : IP Address



3.8.9.3.4 - OTHER / Tools / Reboot screen

In the Tools screen, select the Reboot field and press the ENT key.

When rebooting the device, 3 options are available: No Autotest, Short Autotest orLong Autotest.

Note: After rebooting the device, it automatically recovers the previous activeconfiguration and remains in the previous control mode (local or remote).

3.8.9.3.5 - OTHER / Tools / Option screen

In the Tools screen, select the Option field and press the ENT key.

" In the Option screen, select the Software field and press the ENT key.

Tools / Reboot : No Autotest

Reboot : No Autotest

Tools / Option :

Software Hardware

Option / Software :

00 Low Dl : Enable

01 VBI Pr : Enable

02 Ext. Mod : Disable



The available options are given in the table below:

For example for the first option "Low delay", in the NEW area the operator mustenter the specific key for this option.

Note: The specific key is supplied by NEXTREAM

Caution: When an option is already declared, the previous screen is displayed with thevalue 00.00. If the operator validates the SAVE command, the option is disabled.

Enter the specific key, Place the cursor on the SAVE field. Press ENT. The following screen is

displayed.

Option number Option name

00 Low delay

01 VBI processing

02 External modulator

03 Data injection RS232

04 TS input

05 DVB scrambling / BISS

06 422P@ML

Option / 04 - TS Inp:

NEW : 00.00 SAVE

info : TS input processing



" In the Option screen, select the Hardware field and press the ENT key.

All the hardware options available with their slot allocation are given in the tablebelow:

Place the cursor on the required slot and press ENT.

will be active only after next reboot

Option / Hardware :

Slot 1 : DPSN

Slot 2 : ISMB

Slot 3 : ALARM RELAY

Slot allocation Available choices

0 SSEB

1 DPSN, COMPIN, AMuSE AC3 MPEG, NONE

2 ISMB, AMuSE AC3 MPEG, NONE

3 Alarm Relay Closure, NONE

4 ATADI, NONE

Option / SLOT 2 : ISMB

SLOT 2: ISMB



The operator can press the right arrow key in the SLOT 2 area between the selectioncursors to choose between ISMB, AMuSE AC3 MPEG and NONE. When the choice ismade, press ENT and the following screen appears:

3.8.9.3.6 - OTHER / Tools / About screen

In the Tools screen, select the About field and press the ENT key.

" In the About screen, select the Autotest field and press the ENT key. Thefollowing screen appears for 2 seconds:

will be active only after next reboot

CONTEXT : /

Autotest Information Connections

(ENT) : Autotest report

CONTEXT : / Autotest

Autotest OK



" In the About screen, select the Information field and press the ENT key. Thismenu comprises 4 screens:

First screen: Software version and IP address

Second screen: Licensed software options

Third screen: Licensed hardware options

Fourth screen: Equipment code used to obtain new software options

CONTEXT : / Information

Type : SSE IP Address : 172.16.10.175

TES: 99.41 SSB: 2.0.6.4 ISP :9 Hdw: 4 50Hz

Scrambler : ALL PRESS ENT


-- OPTIONS LIST --

0 1 2 3 4 5 6

N41SLODE : Low delay


Slot 1 : DPSN Slot 2 : ISMB MODUL

Firmware 2.30


Equipment code : 0XCE1C

Serial number : 16831237AA/01004

AUD10:600 AUD11:600 AUD20:600 AUD21:600



Note: The equipment code is required for licence code generation to enable softwareoptions.

" In the About screen, select the Connections field and press the ENT key.

3.8.9.3.7 - OTHER / Tools / Time screen

In the Tools screen, select the Time field and press the ENT key.

The Time field indicates the current date and time.

In LOCAL mode, the user can modify the date by pressing the ENT key. The thirdand fourth lines are modified and the following screen appears:

CONTEXT : / Connections

-- CONNECTIONS LIST --

PC : INFO PC : EVT PC : INFO

[PC name]

CONTEXT : /

Time (Y/M/D H:M:S) : time

(ENT) : Time set

CONTEXT : /

Time (Y/M/D H:M:S) : time

+ YYYY MM DD HH MM SS Rec

(ENT) : change increment mode



Field definitions and adjustment ranges

The first field can take the values "+" (increase) or "-" (decrease). The YYYY (year) field ranges between 1900 and 2107. The MM (month) field ranges between 1 and 12. The DD (day) field ranges between 1 and 31. The HH (hour) field ranges between 0 and 23. The MM (minutes) field ranges between 0 and 59. The SS (seconds) field ranges between 0 and 59. The Rec (update) field records the current timer values.

Operating mode

To increase (or decrease) a field value, firstly check that there is a + sign (or - sign)in the first field (if not, select the first field and press ENT). Then, select the field tobe adjusted. Finally, press ENT as many times as necessary to get the requiredvalue.

Once the new time has been programmed, select the Rec field and press ENT toconfirm. If the time can be set (LOCAL mode), the previous menu then reappears.In REMOTE mode, the system emits a beep.

Note: The time to be entered is the local time. The offset between local and UTC time maybe set by a remote PC station. This time can be updated either by the front panel or by thereceiving of a broadcast message from GALET software (UTC Time Broadcaster) or byTDT. The default value is set to +2h00 (i.e. local time = UTC time + 2h00).



BLANK PAGE


Chapter 4 - PC operation - Control & Command software 151

Chapter 4PC operation - Control & Command software

4.1 - Ergonomic aspects ............................................................................ 1554.1.1 - Screen .......................................................................................... 1554.1.2 - Mouse ........................................................................................... 1594.1.3 - Setting the interface language...................................................... 1604.1.4 - On-line manuals............................................................................ 1624.1.5 - Simulator mode............................................................................. 163

4.1.5.1 - Activation of simulator mode........................................................ 1634.1.5.2 - Simulation of options.................................................................... 164

4.1.6 - Device locking/unlocking .............................................................. 165

4.2 - Running software ............................................................................... 168

4.3 - Equipment Interface application .................................................... 170

4.4 - Equipment Installation application ................................................ 1734.4.1 - Purpose and scope of the application........................................... 1734.4.2 - Screen layout................................................................................ 1744.4.3 - Declaring the device ..................................................................... 1754.4.4 - Cancelling/validating device installation changes......................... 179

4.4.4.1 - Cancelling changes to device installation .................................... 1794.4.4.2 - Validating changes to device installation ..................................... 180

4.4.5 - Additional device installation commands ...................................... 1814.4.5.1 - Remove a device ......................................................................... 1814.4.5.2 - Change device name and address .............................................. 181

4.5 - Technical Configuration application ............................................. 1844.5.1 - Purpose and scope of the application........................................... 1844.5.2 - Screen layout................................................................................ 1864.5.3 - Device parameters........................................................................ 189

4.5.3.1 - Encoder operating parameters (advanced parameters) .............. 1894.5.3.1.1 - General item............................................................................. 1924.5.3.1.2 - Output item............................................................................... 1944.5.3.1.3 - Encoders item........................................................................... 1964.5.3.1.4 - Data injection item.................................................................... 199


152 Chapter 4 - PC operation - Control & Command software

4.5.3.1.5 - Scrambler item.......................................................................... 2004.5.3.1.6 - SAM card item .......................................................................... 2014.5.3.1.7 - Access control item................................................................... 2024.5.3.1.8 - SIMS item ................................................................................. 2034.5.3.1.9 - Time item .................................................................................. 2044.5.3.1.10 - TBS Signalling item................................................................. 2064.5.3.1.11 - ISO Signalling item ................................................................. 2084.5.3.1.12 - DVB Signalling item ................................................................ 2094.5.3.1.13 - PSIP Signalling item ............................................................... 211

4.5.3.2 - Modulator parameters .................................................................. 2124.5.3.3 - NIT table ....................................................................................... 215

4.5.3.3.1 - Edit the NIT ................................................................................. 2154.5.3.3.2 - Changing descriptors .................................................................. 2194.5.3.3.3 - Deleting descriptors..................................................................... 2194.5.3.3.4 - Saving/Loading a NIT.................................................................. 220

4.5.3.4 - TOT table...................................................................................... 2234.5.3.4.1 - Edit the TOT ................................................................................ 2234.5.3.4.2 - Changing descriptors .................................................................. 2274.5.3.4.3 - Deleting descriptors..................................................................... 227

4.5.3.5 - Saving/Loading a device configuration......................................... 2284.5.3.6 - Archived configurations ................................................................ 2304.5.3.7 - Cancelling/Validating changes ..................................................... 2354.5.3.8 - Device locking / unlocking ............................................................ 237

4.5.4 - Generated Services...................................................................... 2384.5.4.1 - TV service..................................................................................... 239

4.5.4.1.1 - Editing parameters of the video component................................ 2434.5.4.1.2 - Editing parameters of the audio component................................ 2554.5.4.1.3 - Editing parameters of the VBI component................................... 2644.5.4.1.4 - Editing parameters of the data component ................................. 2714.5.4.1.5 - PMT descriptors .......................................................................... 2834.5.4.1.6 - SDT descriptors........................................................................... 289

4.5.4.2 - Advanced Functions ..................................................................... 2904.5.4.2.1 - Shared components .................................................................... 2904.5.4.2.2 - Ghost components ...................................................................... 2914.5.4.2.3 - Inband command......................................................................... 293

4.5.5 - TS input ........................................................................................ 2934.5.5.1 - First level filtering: stopping/passing the TS input ........................ 2984.5.5.2 - Second level filtering: filtering conditions on the tributary,

selecting services and EMM flows ...................................................... 2984.5.5.2.1 - General filtering conditions on the tributary................................. 2984.5.5.2.2 - Selection of services ................................................................... 3034.5.5.2.3 - Selection of EMM flows ............................................................... 306

4.5.5.3 - Third level filtering: filtering conditions on services ...................... 3094.5.5.3.1 - General filtering conditions.......................................................... 3094.5.5.3.2 - Individual filtering of components ................................................ 3124.5.5.3.3 - Attaching components................................................................. 316


Chapter 4 - PC operation - Control & Command software 153

4.5.5.3.4 - Removing a service .................................................................... 3214.5.5.4 - Fourth level filtering: filtering conditions on components ............. 322

4.5.5.4.1 - General filtering conditions ......................................................... 3224.5.5.4.2 - Removing a component .............................................................. 324

4.6 - Monitoring & Redundancy application......................................... 3264.6.1 - Purpose and scope of the application........................................... 3264.6.2 - Screen layout................................................................................ 3274.6.3 - Alarm supervision ......................................................................... 334

4.6.3.1 - Alarms window............................................................................. 3344.6.3.2 - Equipment window....................................................................... 338

4.6.4 - Supervision of services and data flow .......................................... 3404.6.5 - Save all/Load all commands......................................................... 3434.6.6 - Maintenance commands............................................................... 3444.6.7 - Audible warning of alarms ............................................................ 350

4.7 - Download application .................................................................... 3514.7.1 - Purpose and scope of the application........................................... 3514.7.2 - Screen layout................................................................................ 3514.7.3 - Procedure ..................................................................................... 353

4.7.3.1 - Before downloading ..................................................................... 3534.7.3.2 - Downloading ................................................................................ 3584.7.3.3 - After downloading ........................................................................ 359

4.7.4 - Additional commands ................................................................... 360

4.8 - Event Log application .................................................................... 3624.8.1 - Principles of the Event Log application ...................................... 362

4.8.1.1 - Event ............................................................................................ 3624.8.1.2 - View configuration functions ........................................................ 3634.8.1.3 - Event exporting ............................................................................ 3634.8.1.4 - Miscellaneous .............................................................................. 364

4.8.2 - Screen layout................................................................................ 3644.8.3 - Commands ................................................................................... 368

4.8.3.1 - Commands for opening an event log file ..................................... 3684.8.3.2 - Command for exporting in text format.......................................... 3694.8.3.3 - Display commands....................................................................... 3714.8.3.4 - Calculation commands................................................................. 376

4.9 - Alarm Help application.................................................................... 3794.9.1 - Scope............................................................................................ 3794.9.2 - Features........................................................................................ 379

4.9.2.1 - Extended description of alarms.................................................... 379


154 Chapter 4 - PC operation - Control & Command software

4.9.2.2 - Print capability .............................................................................. 3804.9.2.3 - Search engine .............................................................................. 3804.9.2.4 - Navigation tool.............................................................................. 3804.9.2.5 - Synchronisation with the Monitoring & Redundancy

and Event Log applications................................................................ 3804.9.2.6 - Synchronisation with other applications ....................................... 3804.9.2.7 - User defined comments................................................................ 3804.9.2.8 - French/English versions ............................................................... 3814.9.2.9 - Customisation of display............................................................... 3814.9.2.10 - Summary of alarms .................................................................... 3814.9.2.11 - Help / About................................................................................ 381

4.9.3 - Access to the Alarm help application ......................................... 3824.9.3.1 - Access via the Monitoring &Redundancy application ................ 3824.9.3.2 - Access via the Event Log application......................................... 3824.9.3.3 - Access via any application ........................................................... 383

4.9.4 - User Interface (main window and commands) ............................. 384

4.10 - Commands available with the Telnet application ......................... 3904.10.1 - Using the Telnet application ....................................................... 3904.10.2 - IP Settings .................................................................................. 3964.10.3 - Parameter definitions ................................................................. 397

4.10.3.1 - Video bidir................................................................................... 3974.10.3.2 - Audio stream type....................................................................... 3974.10.3.3 - LTW_offset ................................................................................. 3984.10.3.4 - SPE (SuperEncoder) switch source mode ................................. 3984.10.3.5 - VBI stream type .......................................................................... 3984.10.3.6 - LDSChurch mode ....................................................................... 3984.10.3.7 - ABSAT mode.............................................................................. 3994.10.3.8 - Multichoice-D1 mode.................................................................. 3994.10.3.9 - Foxtel 6dB uplift.......................................................................... 4004.10.3.10 - Closed Caption type ................................................................. 4014.10.3.11 - Extended-data insertion (line 284)............................................ 401


Chapter 4 155 4.1 - Ergonomic aspects

4.1 - ERGONOMIC ASPECTS

4.1.1 - Screen

The screen displays:

a title, a menu bar, a tool bar, a main window, a status bar.

When you declare the services and components, you will display the followingscreen:

Foreword

Some commands cannot be directly accessed using the DBS 2930 operating software,however some of them are described in this chapter. These are notably the commandsthat can be accessed using the Telnet application as described in the sectionCommands available with the Telnet application page 390.


156 Chapter 44.1 - Ergonomic aspects

Figure 4.1: Example of screen

TitleThe title displays the application name.

Menu bar

The menu bar provides access to various functions that can be selected via pull-down menus activated with a left mouse click:

quit the session (Quit menu);

confirm, cancel or test changes (Edit menu);

lock/unlock and save functions (Tool menu);

display the software release or access the on-line User Manual (Helpmenu).

menu bar tool bar main window

status bar



Tool bar

The first three buttons provide quick access to the most frequently used functions inthe menu bar:

quit the application ( button equivalent to the Quit control of the menubar),

cancel a change ( button equivalent to the Edit/Cancel control of themenu bar),

confirm a change ( button equivalent to the Edit/Validate control of themenu bar).

The fourth and fifth buttons ( and ) are used to lock or unlock the operatingstation.



Main window

Information appearing in this area is specific to each application as regards contentand formatting (tree structure, icon representation, divisions of the main window).

A tree structure display function (+/- sign) is available in all applications.

+: lower level tree structure not displayed.

-: lower level tree structure displayed.

without sign: indicates no lower level exists.

To display or remove display of the lower level tree structure, double-click on theline featuring the "+" or "-" sign or click once on the "+" or "-" sign.

Figure 4.2: Example of main window with lower level displayed

Figure 4.3: Example of main window with lower level not displayed



When the configuration is active, the status bar displays Active configuration.

Otherwise, the Edited configuration message replaces Active configuration. Apencil indicates the inconsistency between the information displayed and the realconfiguration. The icon will appear each time the operator edits a configuration.The pencil disappears when the operator validates the configuration (click on the

button, the Edit/Validate... command in the menu bar or the Validatemodifications... command in the shortcut menu related to the device in someapplications) or cancels the changes (click on the button, the Edit/Cancel...command in the menu bar or the Cancel modifications... command in the shortcutmenu related to the device in some applications).

Status bar

The status bar provides context-sensitive help, which is general information theuser may require at any time. It is situated at the bottom of the main window.

4.1.2 - Mouse

The left mouse button is used to select an object.

The right mouse button displays a shortcut menu showing all the possible actionsfor this object.

Figure 4.4: Using the mouse (e.g. for encoder configuration)

Left mouse button(selecting an object)

Right mouse button(displaying shortcutmenu)



4.1.3 - Setting the interface language

In all applications except the Equipment Interface application, the languageused for the interface can be selected in the Windows Control Panel (RegionalSettings application). Screens are available in French (for French-speakingcountries) or English.

,,,, Procedure

1. In the Start menu, select Settings, then Control Panel.

2. Click on the Regional Settings icon.

3. In the first tab in this window, choose the interface language: French (Standard)or English (United Kingdom).

Notes:- The language of the Alarm Help application cannot be set. It corresponds to thelanguage chosen in the Windows Control Panel (Regional Settings application) duringinstallation of the DBS 2930 STAND ALONE software. - The chosen language is only acknowledged on application startup. When changinglanguages, rerun any open applications.



Figure 4.5: Regional Settings (Windows NT) or Regional Options (Windows 2000)



4.1.4 - On-line manuals

A command is available on the menu bar of the applications for rapid access to theon-line versions of the user manuals installed on the PC.

This command, located in the Help menu (Help/Operating manual...), displays thelist of .pdf documents located in a default directory. The default directory can bechanged by clicking on Browse...

When you double-click on a document, ACROBAT READER is run as required,loading the .pdf file corresponding to the selected manual.

If you do not have ACROBAT READER, you can install it from the Documenta-tion CD via the Get Acrobat Reader button.



4.1.5 - Simulator mode

This mode is used to simulate the device. When it is activated, the application doesnot transmit anything to the device but simulates the same operation without error.Therefore, no alarm is raised and all validations are acknowledged.

4.1.5.1 - Activation of simulator mode

,,,, Procedure

From the Equipment Installation application:

1. Select the PC icon in the main window;

2. Select the Edit parameters... command;

Figure 4.6: Activation of Simulator mode

3. Click on the Simulator Enabled button;

4. Click on OK;

5. Rerun the Equipment Interface application for the parameter to beacknowledged.



4.1.5.2 - Simulation of options

The presence or absence of options for a device is managed by the EquipmentInstallation application. Simulator mode must be activated beforehand (seeprevious section).

,,,, Procedure to simulate the presence of options

From the Equipment Installation application:

1. Select the device;

2. Select the Edit parameters... option in the shortcut menu (right mouse click);

3. Select the Simulator tab;

Figure 4.7: Presence of options to simulate

4. Click on the options to simulate;

5. Click on OK;

6. Rerun the Equipment Interface application for this parameter to beacknowledged.

Note:This information is saved in the servex.ini file located in the installation directory.



4.1.6 - Device locking/unlocking

The lock/unlock function guarantees coherent operation when several stations arebeing used to operate the device.

It is not necessary to lock or even validate when installing or removing a device.These specific operations are immediately acknowledged by the other applications.

Subsequent changes can also be made without locking the connection. These areindicated by the pencil icon and the Edited configuration message in the statusbar as shown in the figure below:

Figure 4.8: Edited configuration

The changes in progress are not necessarily lost during connection locking. Theuser can choose to save them. Click on , select the Lock device command in theshortcut menu or Tool/Lock all... in the menu bar to display the following dialoguebox:

Figure 4.9: "Lock and lose changes?" confirmation request



To show whether an application is locked or not, the background colour of the mainwindow is white when it is locked and grey otherwise.

Figure 4.10: View of the window when the application is locked

Figure 4.11: View of the window when the application is unlocked



Note:The following screen is displayed when the Ethernet link is not properly connected(disconnected or the equipment is switched off).

Figure 4.12: Availability of the application


168 Chapter 44.2 - Running software

4.2 - RUNNING SOFTWARE

After starting the WINDOWS session on the operating station PC and opening thedirectory which contains the Stand-Alone applications, the following displayappears:

Figure 4.13: Icon display

The icons represent the different "Stand-Alone" software applications.

The software must be run in the following order:

1. Start the operating session by activating the Equipment Interface applicationby double-clicking on the icon.

Notes:1. To shut down a session, close this application after first closing all other applications.2. It is recommended to leave this application open as long as the device is being used,even if no other application has been run.

2. Declare the device via the Equipment Installation application. This step isunnecessary if the device has already been declared in a previous session.

3. Set the technical configuration for the device (operating parameters, signallingtable editing, service creation) from the Technical Configuration application.

4. Start the Monitoring & Redundancy application to monitor the device.5. Start the Download application to download embedded software.6. Start the Event Log application to view events occurring on the encoder

(alarms, reboot, etc.).7. Start the Alarm Help application to understand the meaning of alarms

occurring on the encoder.


Chapter 4 169 4.2 - Running software

Notes:1. The Download Embedded Software application is used by NEXTREAM fordownloading embedded software.2. The ATM Connect Management application does not concern the DBE 4110Encoder.


170 Chapter 44.3 - Equipment Interface application

4.3 - EQUIPMENT INTERFACE APPLICATION

Foreword:

The Equipment Interface application handles communication with the deviceoperated from the PC and operations carried out as background tasks (e.g. alarmcollection). It is recommended to activate the Equipment Interface application (servex.exe)before using any other operating software applications and to remain active as longas the device is operated even if no application is active. Otherwise, an errormessage appears:

Figure 4.14: Error message when the connection with Interface Equipements is not established

If the Equipment Interface application is activated after another one, theconnection with the application is automatically open. This application do not propose any operation command.It is recommended to close all the applications before leaving the EquipmentInterface application. Otherwise the following dialogue box appears:

Figure 4.15: Confirmation before leaving the Interface Equipements application


Chapter 4 171 4.3 - Equipment Interface application

Screen layout

Figure 4.16: Screen

tool bar main windowsecondary windowmenu bar


172 Chapter 44.3 - Equipment Interface application

Menu bar

Tool bar

Main windowReserved.

Secondary window

This window gives the list of open applications.

Menu Command Comment

File Exit Quit the application.

Help About... Details of software version.

Button Comment

Shows application activity.


Chapter 4 173 4.4 - Equipment Installation application

4.4 - EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION APPLICATION

Foreword: It is recommended to activate the Equipment Interface application

(servex.exe) before starting the Equipment Installation application, seenote in section 4.3 - page 170 and to remain the Equipment Interfaceapplication active as long as the device is operated, even if no application isactive.

It is not necessary to lock the application (or validate) to de-install or install adevice.

The language used for the interface can be selected. Screens are available inFrench or English (see section 4.1.3 - Setting the interface language page 160).

4.4.1 - Purpose and scope of the application

The main function of the Equipment Installation application is declaring thedevice. This condition is essential for the device to be configured and supervisedfrom other software applications.

The following sections present the screen layout and the different functions offeredby the application.

section 4.4.2 Screen layout

section 4.4.3 Declaring the device

section 4.4.4 Cancelling/validating device installation changes

section 4.4.5 Additional device installation commands:. Remove a device,. Change device name and address.


174 Chapter 44.4 - Equipment Installation application

4.4.2 - Screen layout

Figure 4.17: Screen

Menu bar


Quit Quit the application.

Edit Cancel... Cancel changes and display the last saved configuration (i.e. the active configuration).

Validate... Confirm changes. The edited configuration is saved, it becomes the active configuration.

Tool Lock all... Lock all device connections (this command has the same effect as the shortcut Lock device command in Stand-Alone opera-tion), see section 4.1.6 - Device locking/unlocking page 165 for details.

Unlock all... Unlock all device connections (this command has the same effect as the shortcut Unlock device command in Stand-Alone operation), see section 4.1.6 - Device locking/unlocking page 165 for details.

Help About... Details about software version.

Operating manual...

Open on-line user manuals.see section 4.1.4 - On-line manuals page 162 for details.




Tool bar

Main windowWhen the application is started up, a list of devices is displayed. This list takes theform of a two-level tree structure and each line is preceded by an icon whichfacilitates identification of the different device types:

level 1, at the top of the list, features the PC element which is unique andrepresents the operating PC,

level 2 features the encoder directly operated by the PC through the Ethernetlink.

4.4.3 - Declaring the device

When the application is activated, the main window contains just the icon of the PCif it is the first time it is being used, or the tree structure of the last savedconfiguration. If the previous representation is not suitable, it should be deleted (seesection 4.4.5.1 - Remove a device page 181) or modified (see section 4.4.5.2 -Change device name and address page 181).

Note: The IP address of the device must be entered beforehand using the appropriatecommand on the front panel (menu: Other/Tools/IP Address).

Button Comment

Quit the application.

Cancel changes and display the last saved configuration (i.e. the active con-figuration).

Confirm changes. The configuration is saved.

Lock the terminal for the current application. The main window background is white.Unlock the terminal for the current application. The main window back-ground is grey.



Figure 4.18: Main window in the absence of a previous declaration

,,,, Procedure for declaring the device

1. Select the icon representing the PC.

2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing PC-specificcommands.

3. Choose the Add a device... command.

A first dialogue box then opens.

Add a device...

Edit parameters...



Figure 4.19: Device parameter fields (type)

4. Select the Digital Broadcast Encoder type and the device model DBE 4110(DSNG).

5. Click on Next >.

A second dialogue box is displayed.

Figure 4.20: Device parameter fields (address)



6. Enter the devices name and IP address. The device name will be used by theother applications.

7. Click on Finish.

The declared device appears in the tree structure with the following information:name, IP address.

Figure 4.21: Main window after declaring the device

Note:The Stand-Alone Control & Command software supplied with the DBE 4110 only allowsinstallation of one DBE 4110.



4.4.4 - Cancelling/validating device installation changes

4.4.4.1 - Cancelling changes to device installation

,,,, Procedure

1. Select the pull-down Edit menu in the menu bar.

Figure 4.22: Command for cancelling changes

2. Choose the Cancel... command.

A dialogue box is then available to confirm that you wish to cancel the changes.

Figure 4.23: Confirmation request

3. Click on OK.

After confirmation, the command is executed and the display reflects the devicesactive configuration.

Note: The button achieves the same effect.



4.4.4.2 - Validating changes to device installation

Configuration changes are only effective when validated.

,,,, Procedure

1. Select the pull-down Edit menu in the menu bar.

Figure 4.24: Command for validating changes

2. Choose the Validate... command.

A dialogue box is then available to confirm changes.


3. Click on OK.

After confirmation, the command is executed and the display reflects the devicesactive configuration.

The lower right-hand edge of the main window now displays the words "Activeconfiguration" and the pencil icon next to the device has disappeared.

Note: The button achieves the same effect.



4.4.5 - Additional device installation commands

4.4.5.1 - Remove a device

The command for removing the device is used to cancel declaration of that device.

,,,, Procedure

1. Select the device in the tree structure.

2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specificcommands.

3. Choose the Remove command.

4.4.5.2 - Change device name and address

This command uses the dialogue box used for device declaration.

,,,, Procedure

1. Select the device in the tree structure.


3. Choose the Edit parameters... command.

Edit parameters...

Remove

Lock device

Unlock device

Edit parameters...

Remove

Lock device

Unlock device



Figure 4.26: Edit device parameters dialogue box (1/2)

Note: The IP address cannot be modified from this dialogue box. To change the IP address it isnecessary to de-install, then re-install the device (see section 4.4.3 - Declaring the devicepage 175) with the new address.



The second screen indicates the type of encoder used.

Figure 4.27: Edit device parameters dialogue box (2/2)


184 Chapter 44.5 - Technical Configuration application

4.5 - TECHNICAL CONFIGURATION APPLICATION

Foreword: Before starting the Technical Configuration application, it is recommended

to activate the Equipment Interface application (servex.exe), see note insection 4.3 - page 170. It is recommended to activate this application beforeusing any other operating software applications.

To modify parameters in the application, do not forget to lock the terminal forthe current application ( ). The commands are then accessible. The mainwindow background is white.

The language used for the interface can be selected. Screens are available inFrench or English (see section 4.1.3 - Setting the interface language).


The main configuration functions of a DBE 4110 single-service encoder availableto the user are as follows:

edit the parameters of the operated device: output frequency, TS packet size,etc.;

declare standard TV, radio, VBI services; edit video component, audio components, teletext component, private data

components; edit Network Information Table (NIT); edit Time Offset Table (TOT); edit descriptors in the PMT and SDT tables; edit filtering conditions on the TS Input for remultiplexing.


Chapter 4 185 4.5 - Technical Configuration application

IMPORTANT:

In the Technical Configuration application, TS bitrates are maximum estimatedvalues used to check that the output multiplex rate is high enough to transmit all thecomponents. Estimated TS bitrates may be slightly higher than the measured onesdisplayed in the Monitoring & Redundancy application, e.g. an estimated417kbit/s component will be measured at around 407kbit/s.

The following sections present the screen layout and the different functionsavailable with the application.


section 4.5.3 Device parameters. Encoder operating parameters (advanced parameters),. Modulator parameters,. NIT table,. TOT table,. Saving/Loading a device configuration. Archived configurations,. Cancelling/Validating changes,. Device locking / unlocking

section 4.5.4 Generated Services. TV service,

. Editing parameters of the video component,

. Editing parameters of the audio component,

. Editing parameters of the VBI component,

. Editing parameters of the data component,

. PMT descriptors,

. SDT descriptors,. Advanced Functions,

. Shared components,

. Ghost components,

. Inband command.

section 4.5.5 TS input. First level filtering: stopping/passing the TS input (level 2). Second level filtering: filtering conditions on the tributary, select-ing services and EMM flows (level 3). Third level filtering: filtering conditions on services (level 4). Fourth level filtering: filtering conditions on components (level 5)




Figure 4.28: Screen

Menu bar



Edit Cancel... Cancel changes and display the last saved configuration (i.e. the active configuration).

Validate... Confirm changes. The edited configuration is saved; it becomes the active configuration.

Tool Lock all... Lock the device (configuration commands are accessible). See section 4.1.6 - Device locking/unlocking for details.

Unlock all... Unlock the device (configuration commands are not accessi-ble). See section 4.1.6 - Device locking/unlocking for details.

Save all... Save your configurations to file (see following note).

Help About... Information about software version.

Operating manual...

Open on-line user manual.See section 4.1.4 - On-line manuals for details.

Level 1

Level 2

Level 4


Level 3

Level 2Level 3

Level 5Level 4



Note concerning the "Save all" command:This function is used to back up the active configuration of operated devices. The createdfiles can then be reloaded from the Technical Configuration application. When theSave all... command is selected in the menu bar, the following dialogue box is displayedfor you to define the path to the folder where you want to save your configuration alongwith any associated comment which will feature in the header of each file. The Browse...button is available for you to select the file location. The program automatically creates afolder, which takes the name of the device, in which configuration files will be saved. Thefile name always consists of "technical" plus the user-defined suffix (e.g.technical_001.mcf). There is no point in adding an extension as the .mcf extension is addedby default. When you have entered the fields, click on OK to confirm and then validate (button or Edit/Validate... in the menu bar).

Root Path Root Path is the root directory. The Browse... buttonis used for selecting another directory from the list ofavailable directories. If the directory entered does notexist, the command fails.

Suffix Suffix is the text attached to the file name. Do notadd the _ character as it will be addedautomatically.

Comment Comment placed in each file. It is displayed on fileretrieval.



Tool bar

Main window

A three level tree view shows the encoder which was pre-installed via theEquipment Installation application.

level 1, at the top of the list, represents the encoder, level 2 represents

- a "Generated Services" item that groups together all the services generatedlocally by the encoder. Under this item are represented:

. at level 3: the generated services with indication of their type (TVservice, radio service, etc.) and their names,. at level 4: the components with indication of their type (video, audio,VBI, data), their PIDs, their physical sources (board and connector) andtheir programmed rates.

- the "Tributary" or TS item. Under this item are represented:. at level 3: the input TS,. at level 4: the filtered services of the input TS,. at level 5: the filtered components of the filtered services from theinput TS and also the attached components (local data component atta-ched to an incoming TS service).

Button Comment


Cancel changes and display the last saved configuration (i.e. the active configuration).

Confirm changes. The edited configuration is saved; it becomes the active configuration.

Lock the terminal for the current application. The commands are accessible. The main window background is white.Unlock the terminal for the current application. The commands are not accessible (only consultation is possible). The main window background is grey.



4.5.3 - Device parameters

4.5.3.1 - Encoder operating parameters (advanced parameters)

The application has an Edit advanced parameters... command for displaying andediting the parameters related to general operation of the device.

,,,, Procedure

1. Select the device;

2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specificcommands;

3. Choose the Edit advanced parameters... command.

Edit advanced parameters...

Edit modulator parameters...

NIT >

TOT >

Load device configuration...

Save device configuration...

Archived configurations...

Cancel modifications...

Validate modifications...

Lock device...

Unlock device...



Figure 4.29: Device configuration dialogue box

Owing to the number of parameters, they are grouped into Items.

The left-hand part of the dialogue box displays the list of items. Selecting an itemdisplays the associated parameters in the right-hand part of the dialogue box.

The OK button confirms the content of all the pages, the Cancel button undoes thechanges.

Caution:

1. Certain parameters correspond to device sizing. These sizing parameters are usedby the device to allocate memory space on device initialisation. If the parametersetting is wrong, more memory may be required than is available. In this event, thedevice cannot be started up. This is indicated on the front panel of the device.

2. Changes are only effective after validation ( button or Edit/Validate...command in the menu bar) or, for a number of parameters marked by the symbol, after rebooting the device.

parameters for item currently selected in the list of itemslist of items



A prompt is then automatically displayed:

Figure 4.30: Reboot dialogue box

Select the device (a tick should be displayed in front of the device name) then clickon OK.

Figure 4.31: Reboot command



4.5.3.1.1 - General item

Figure 4.32: General parameters

Purpose: configure the output signal.

In the Signalling mode area

ISO Only ISO/MPEG2 tables (PAT, PMT, CAT) are sentin the outgoing signal (in compliance with the MPEG2ISO 13818-1: Generic Coding of Moving Picturesand Associated Audio: Systems standard).

ISO (with NIT in PAT) If DVB SI signalling is injected by an external device,the encoder generates MPEG2 tables (PAT, PMT,CAT) with mention of the NIT (PID = 16 in decimal)in the PAT.

PSIP terrestrial Reserved for ATSC. If selected, a PSIP Signallingitem replaces DVB Signalling in the left-hand Itemslist.

PSIP cable Reserved for ATSC. Same remark as for PSIPterrestrial above.

DVB The device also generates and transmits DVB tables(NIT, SDT, EIT, TDT, TOT).

Without signalling The device transmits no signalling.



In the Frequency Area area

50 Hz / 60 Hz The commands in certain dialogue boxes depend onthe chosen standard: video source PAL/SECAM orNTSC if presence of the DPSN or COMPIN board,video resolution, etc.

In the Alarm relay area

Alarm relay triggers on major alarms

The alarm relay on the MDSL board is activated bymajor alarms.

Alarm relay triggers on major or minor alarms

The alarm relay on the MDSL board is activated bymajor and minor alarms.

This area is enabled if the Alarm relay closure hardware option (N41HMSDLAK)has been installed.



4.5.3.1.2 - Output item

Figure 4.33: Parameters related to output

Purpose: set the output signal.

In the Output clock area

Internally synthesised The MPEG output signal rate is given by an adjustableinternal frequency synthesiser. It is possible, using theSet command two lines below, to optimise the rate byminimising the number of null packets sent by theencoder. The calculation takes into account the valuesof the component rates generated by the device as wellas the rates allocated to signalling and ECM.

Notes: 1. If the TS output is exceeded, the component rate mustnot be increased. If this is the case, firstly reduce thecomponent rate. It is necessary to increase first the TSoutput and then the component rate.2. If the Set command does not take into account theOutput clock changes when you modify the Max bitratevalue. For example:



- Change the Max bitrate value,- Click on the OK button and close the window,- Open the window and click on Set command,- Validate the changes.

Optimal frequency Minimum clock frequency of the TS for transmittingthe defined service. This frequency can be calculatedwith the Set button. It can be useful to help recordingthe TS output on a server.

In the Maximum Bitrates area

Signalisation This value sets the alarm generation threshold andreserves the output rate required to send the signalling.When the equipment output rate is low, it is necessaryto make adjustments to optimise the reserved rate. Themaximum value is 3Mbit/s.

ECM Used for alarm generation.

In the TS packet size area, the operator can choose the size of packets multiplexedin the outgoing TS.

188 bytes This button corresponds to the standardised TS packetsize, conforming to the MPEG2 ISO 13818-1:Generic Coding of Moving Pictures and AssociatedAudio: Systems standard.

188+16 bytes The device adds 16 stuffing bytes after each 188 bytepacket. This mode may be used when the device isconnected to a satellite or cable modulator. Themodulator then replaces these bytes by Reed-Solomonerror correcting code.

Note: When the ISMB board is used, TS packets must be in188 + 16 form.



4.5.3.1.3 - Encoders item

Figure 4.34: Parameters related to encoders

Purpose: set internal encoding elements (video, audio, teletext).

In the Service encoder area

LTW offset This parameter (Legal Time Window Offset)indicates to any subsequent multiplexer theprocedure for using the Buffer BSmux of decodermodel T-STD for that TS flow.

In the Video compression area, the Mode parameter determines the mode whichwill be used to extract compressed frames from decoder buffers.

Leak Extraction is conditioned by PTS/DTS time stamps.

VBV delay (Video Buffering Verifier)Not available in this version.



In the PCR clock generation area

Internal reference The clock is generated by the encoders internaloscillator.

Synchronized on PCR ... The clock is generated by the encoders internaloscillator. The oscillator is synchronised with anincoming PCR on the TS input defined by PID xxxx.

In the Audio delay matching for Multi Encoder Service (MES) area,In the case of Multi-Encoder services, several encoders are cascaded but only one ofthem generates the video component. The others generate the audio components.The settings for this area adjust the audio delay according to the video delay in theencoder that generates the video component, thus producing correctsynchronisation (lipsync). This delay depends on the video encoders configuration.

This encoder does not generate the MES video component The encoder does notgenerate the video compenent and the delays definedin the following 2 settings are enabled.

Configuring the encoder that generates the MES video:

SuperEncoder filtering Off: The video encoder is not fitted with aSuperEncoder board.with C1P: The first encoding pass function of theSuperEncoder board in the video encoder is enabled.with C1P & RDB: The first encoding pass and NoiseReduction functions of the SuperEncoder board in thevideo encoder are enabled.without C1P & RDB: The first encoding pass andNoise Reduction functions of the SuperEncoder boardin the video encoder are disabled.

Analog video board typedefines the analogue video board type used by thevideo encoder. No analog video board: The video comes from thedigital signal.DPSN: The video is injected onto the DPSN board.COMPIN with synchro off: The video is injected ontothe COMPIN board with internal boardsynchronisation. COMPIN with synchro on: The video is injected onto



the COMPIN board and is synchronised by an externalsignal.

In the SuperEncoder Board area,

This area is never enabled with a 4110 encoder.



4.5.3.1.4 - Data injection item

Figure 4.35: Parameters related to data injection

Purpose: set data injection by the TCP DVB protocol.

In the Data or EMM injection using DVB Simulcrypt area

Service port Used for data or EMM injection with the DVB simulcrypt protocol, this field specifies the port used for data injection in TCP mode and bandwidth negotiation in UDP mode. In UDP mode, bandwidth negotiation is optional.Value between 0 and 65535.Default value: 32000. If changed a device reboot is necessary.



4.5.3.1.5 - Scrambler item

Figure 4.36: Parameters related to scrambler

Purpose: scrambling and access control configuration.

In the General scrambling area

ECM repetition rate This parameter sets the rate of ECM messages.



4.5.3.1.6 - SAM card item

Figure 4.37: Parameters related to SAM card

Purpose: generating and authenticating control words.

In the SAM card area

Detachable The Detachable SAM card function is not availablefor encoders and hence greyed out.

Integrated Generation and authentication of control words isperformed by software installed in the equipmentwhich emulates an external SAM card. The set-upof an external SAM card therefore becomesunnecessary.



4.5.3.1.7 - Access control item

Figure 4.38: Parameters related to Access Control

Purpose: assigning Access Control management, irrelevant in a Stand-Alonecontext.

In the Access control area

None The services or components are not subject toAccess Control (VIACCESS or SIMULCRYPT).

External Select this field when the services or componentsare subject to Access Control (VIACCESS orSIMULCRYPT). Access Control is managed by theDBS 29xx Channel Controller (MCC).



4.5.3.1.8 - SIMS item

Figure 4.39: Parameters related to SIMS

Purpose: configure connections between the encoder and a SIMS (SignalisationInformation Management System).

In the Signalisation Management System Identification area

IP Address Address of the SIMS. The network and sub-networkfields must be identical to those in the encoder IPaddress.

In the Inform SIMS about the broadcast signalisation area

No This command disables the link from the encoder tothe SIMS.

Yes This command enables the link from the encoder to theSIMS. Unless otherwise indicated in the Non standardport field, the link uses standard port 2005.

Non standard port Text box to input the value of a different port to thestandard port.

In the Broadcast SIMS signalisation area

No This command disables the link from the SIMS to theencoder.



Yes This command enables the link from the SIMS to theencoder. Unless otherwise indicated in the Nonstandard port field, the link uses standard port 2006.

Non standard port Text box to input the value of a different port to thestandard port.

DVB Signalling Master This command forces insertion of the SDTactual andEIT from the SIMS.

Caution:

It is essential that closed socket detection time-out by SIGMA SI is one minuteinstead of two hours, as by default on a PC. If the time-out remains at two hours, areset encoder cannot establish a connection with SIGMA until the two hours are up.

4.5.3.1.9 - Time item

Figure 4.40: Parameters related to time

Purpose: time setting. The time supported by the device is UTC time.



In the Time setting area

Manual Equipment time setting is performed from thecommands on the front panel of the device.

Automatic. Set up by messages broadcast on port:Equipment time setting is performed from messagesreceived on the Ethernet link providing UTC time. Themessages are sent by the GALET UTC TimeBroadcaster software installed on the Operatingstation. GALET software is an option. Port 4000 isthe default reception port.

Automatic. Set up by TDT table received on input:Available for devices featuring the TS input option.

In the Local time offset for front panel area

Local time - UTC time This parameter sets the current difference betweenlocal time displayed on the front panel and UTC time.

New offset Values of time change update.

Valid from (dd/mm/yyyy) Date of time change update.



4.5.3.1.10 - TBS Signalling item

Figure 4.41: Parameters related to TBS signalling

Purpose: set table broadcasting frequency.

In the MDT table area

Generate MDT In order to support the detection of service failure,provide information for remedial measures andefficiently log such events, a transport mechanism, theMultiplex Diagnostic Table (MDT) has been definedby SES (Société Européenne des Satellites). Thissystem will serve to convey diagnostic informationabout the consistency of all DVB/MPEG-2multiplexes on ASTRA to the central DINO inBetzdorf. The MDT can be generated by the encoder tosignal missing streams (e.g. video, audio, subtitle oraccompanied data) or Service Information components(e.g. NIT, SDT, EIT or TDT) within the multiplex.

In the INBAND command parameters area

ICT Repetition rate Repetition rate of the private ICT table used totransport INBAND commands. The default value is0.5s.

Component stream Value used by the encoder to indicate the stream typeof the INBAND COMMAND components in theservice PMTs. The default value is 170.



In the INBAND command management area

Execute commands Check this box if the device is to process or ignore theINBAND commands it receives.Default value: On.

Don't forward commands Check this box if the device is to filter all INBANDcommands received. This parameter does not affectINBAND commands created on the device. Default value: On.

Notes:The parameters in the INBAND command management and INBAND Splicing com-mand areas are only visible on devices featuring at least one TS input.The Inband command is irrelevant for the DBE 4110 encoder.



4.5.3.1.11 - ISO Signalling item

Figure 4.42: Parameters related to ISO signalling


This panel is used to set the recurrence of PSI (PAT, PMT, CAT) table transmissionin the output signal.

In the TS identification area

Original_network_id and Transport_stream_idThese parameters identify the output flow in a uniqueway (there must be no two flows with the sameOriginal_network_id/Transport_stream_id). Theseparameters are inserted in the internal signalling tablesand the external source EITactual signalling tables.



4.5.3.1.12 - DVB Signalling item

Figure 4.43: Parameters related to DVB signalling


Repetition rates of DVB actual tables area

This panel is used to set the recurrence of DVB (NIT,SDT, TOT, BAT, TDT, EITp/f, EITs) tabletransmission in the output signal.

Notes: 1. When a table or sub-table is externally loaded with adefined repetition rate, it is no longer affected by thesedefault values.2.When a sub-table is loaded in an multiplexer to replace aprevious one, the replacement actually happens when theprevious equivalent sub-table has been transmitted in full(i.e. after the last section of the sub-table). In the meantime,the new sub-table is stored but not transmitted. In addition,each sub-table has to be sent at least once to avoiddiscontinuity of version numbers. Various side effectsensue:



- in the intermediate stage, the two sub-tables co-exist andtake up space in the device buffers,- if another equivalent sub-table is loaded in theintermediate stage, there will be three sub-tables in thememory,- if EITs (with a very slow broadcast rate) are loaded veryquickly, it is possible to end up with a number of equivalenttables at the same time which may require several secondsto clear. For example, when five EIT tables are loaded veryquickly (with a repetition rate of 10 seconds), the last oneloaded will be transmitted 40 to 50 seconds after loading.3. Only the EIT_schedule 80 to 84 tables are supported bydevices (equivalent to 20 days of programme guide).

Generate TSDT area

The TSDT table is an ISO table, the contents of whichare defined by DVB. This table is used in DSNGapplications where editing of the SI tables in the fieldmay be impossible due to operational problems(compliant with ETS prEN 301 210 standard). TheTSDT is used to identify the transmitting satellitestation.The station identification parameter entered here isdisplayed on the front panel of the encoder.

Repetition rates of DVB other tables areaThis panel is used to set the recurrence of DVB othertable transmission in the output signal.



4.5.3.1.13 - PSIP Signalling item

This item is displayed in place of "DVB Signalling" if in the General area thePSIP terrestrial or PSIP cable box is checked. The "PSIP Signalling" item isreserved for standard ATSC.

4. Click on the button to activate the new configuration (or alternatively, clickon the button to cancel the changes).



4.5.3.2 - Modulator parameters

,,,, Procedure for editing modulator parameters

1. Select the device.


3. Choose the Edit modulator parameters... command.



NIT >

TOT >






Lock device...

Unlock device...



The following dialogue box displays modulator parameters.

Figure 4.44: Modulator parameters

The Output parameters area consists of the following fields:

Roll-off Automatic, selects 35% for DVB-QPSK modes and26% for NTC-8PSK and NTC-16 QAM modes.

Convolution QPSK 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 6/7, 7/8.8PSK 2/3, 5/6, 8/9.16QAM 3/4, 7/8.

IF/RF level Default value: -20dBmMin: -20dBm. Max: +5dBm

Frequency (IF/RF) Default value: 70MHzMin: 50MHz. Max: 180MHz

L_Band level Default value: -20dBmMin: -20dBm. Max: +5dBm

Note: the 0.5dBm level step is not managed by the DBS 2930.

Note: the 125Hz frequency step is not managed by the DBS 2930.

Note: the 0.5dBm level step is not managed by the DBS 2930.



Frequency (L_Band) Default value: 1140MHzMin: 950MHz. Max: 1750MHz

The Output control area consists of the following fields:

Transmission/Modulation On, Pure carrier or Off.

Spectral inversion On or Off.

The Information area consists of the following consult fields:

Input bitrate, Packet size, Symbol rate, Bandwidth.

4. Click on OK.

5. Click on the button to activate the new configuration (or alternatively, clickon the button to cancel the changes). Two dialogue boxes will then be displayedin turn for you to confirm your entry.

Note: the 1kHz frequency step is managed by the DBS 2930.



4.5.3.3 - NIT table

The Technical Configuration application has a function for editing the NITactual(Network Information Table) and different options such as descriptor modificationor deletion and saving of tables in file format.

The NITactual consists of descriptors related to the actual network (the actualnetwork is the network to which the Transport Stream from the device belongs) andto the various TSs in the network.

Descriptors must be added in compliance with the DVB standard set out in thereference document ETS 300 468 "Specification for Service Information (SI) inDigital Video Broadcasting (DVB) systems".

The NITactual allows decoders to find the list of channels and services belonging tothe current network.

4.5.3.3.1 - Edit the NIT

,,,, Procedure





NIT >

TOT >






Lock device...

Unlock device...



3. Choose the NIT > command.

4. Choose the Edit... command.

A dialogue box will be displayed containing the contents of the table.

Figure 4.45: Editing the NIT

The dialogue box contains two parts:

Descriptors: display of descriptors for the network and Transport Streams(TS).

Parameters: display of parameters relating to the item selected in theDescriptors part.

Notes:

There is only one Networkactual item. A NITactual network may contain several TSs. A Network or TS item can contain several descriptors.

Edit...

Save...

Load...



,,,, Procedure for editing a network descriptor

1. Select the existing Network item in the Descriptors side of the dialogue box(Figure 4.45 page 216).

2. Enter the Network ID in the Parameters side of the dialogue box as required.

3. Click on the Add... button.

A new dialogue box is displayed:

Figure 4.46: Add a Descriptor or Transport Stream item

4. Choose the Descriptor option and click on OK.

The dialogue box displayed can be used to select the required network descriptor.

Figure 4.47: Editing a descriptor

5. Select the required option. The pull-down Standard option allows a choicebetween the various descriptors in the dialogue box: network_name,ML_network_name, linkage, private_data_specifier and stuffing. These descriptorsare defined in the reference document ETS 300 468 "Specification for ServiceInformation (SI) in Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB) systems". Click on OK.



The initial dialogue box will display the selected descriptors on the left-handDescriptors side.

6. Fill in the fields specific to the descriptor.

7. Repeat the last four steps for each required descriptor.

8. Click on OK.


Editing a Transport Stream descriptor

To edit a TS descriptor the TS item has to be created beforehand and then edited viaTS item descriptor editing.

,,,, Procedure to create the Transport Stream item

1. Select the Network item on the Descriptors side of the dialogue box (Figure 4.45page 216).


3. Choose the Transport stream option in the dialogue box (Figure 4.46) and clickon OK. The Original Network ID set by default is that of the network. The TS IDentered must be between 1 and 65535.

,,,, Procedure to edit or add a descriptor in the TS item

1. Select the TS item on the Descriptors side of the dialogue box (Figure 4.45 page216).


3. Choose the Descriptor option in the dialogue box (Figure 4.46) and click on OK.

4. Choose one of the various descriptors that appears in the dialogue box:cable_delivery, satellite_delivery, terrestrial_delivery, frequency_list,private_data_specifier, service_list and stuffing. These descriptors are defined inthe reference document ETS 300 468 "Specification for Service Information (SI) inDigital Video Broadcasting (DVB) systems". Click on OK.



5. Fill in the fields specific to the descriptor.

6. Repeat the last four steps for each required descriptor.

7. Click on OK.


4.5.3.3.2 - Changing descriptors

,,,, Procedure for changing a network or TS descriptor

1. Select the descriptor to be changed in the Descriptors part of the dialogue box(Figure 4.45 page 216).

2. Change the parameters in the right-hand Parameters part of the dialogue box.

3. Click on OK.


4.5.3.3.3 - Deleting descriptors

,,,, Procedure for deleting a network descriptor

1. Select the descriptor to be deleted in the Descriptors part of the dialogue box(Figure 4.45 page 216).

2. Click on the Remove... button.

3. Click on OK.




4.5.3.3.4 - Saving/Loading a NIT

When the new configuration is activated, the NIT is inserted in the TS output flow.This table is stored by the equipment.

The application offers the additional possibility of saving the NITs in file format(save on PC or another storage medium) as, for example, when upgrading thesoftware version, the saved memory is reset and the previous configuration is lostfor the saved NIT. The NIT then requires reloading from the TechnicalConfiguration application.

,,,, Procedure for saving a NIT



3. Choose the NIT... command.

4. Choose the Save... command.

A dialogue box is displayed to enter the parameters required for saving the file, i.e.the file name and a comment associated with the file.



NIT >

TOT >






Lock device...

Unlock device...

Edit...

Save...

Load...



Figure 4.48: Saving a NIT

There is no point in giving a file extension, as the software adds the extension (.dvb)to all saved NIT files.

The file will be saved in the directory indicated in the dialogue box. The directorycan be changed by clicking on the Browse... button.

,,,, Procedure for loading a NIT





NIT >

TOT >






Lock device...

Unlock device...



3. Choose the NIT... command.

4. Choose the Load... command.

A dialogue box is displayed for choosing the saved file to be used.

Figure 4.49: Loading a saved file

The dialogue box shows the configurations available in the current directory.

Edit...

Save...

Load...



4.5.3.4 - TOT table

The TOT is a DVB signalling table which gives the offsets between local time andUTC time for a list of countries. This table must be changed before the clockschange from summer to winter time and vice versa.

4.5.3.4.1 - Edit the TOT

,,,, Procedure



3. Choose the TOT > command.

4. Choose the Edit... command.



NIT >

TOT >






Lock device...

Unlock device...

Edit...

Save...

Load...



A dialogue box will be displayed containing the contents of the table.

Figure 4.50: Editing the TOT

When creating a TOT it is necessary to declare a Local time offset descriptor, a listof time offsets will be associated. In a list, the number of elements is limited to 13.

,,,, Procedure for adding a TOT descriptor


2. A second dialogue box is displayed:

Figure 4.51: Add a descriptor



3. Click on OK to add the Local time offset descriptor to the list. The previousdialogue box will then display the descriptor on the left-hand side as shown below:

Figure 4.52: Editing the TOT

4. Click on Add... in the right-hand panel. A dialogue box will be displayed for youto select the country concerned. Edit the parameters and click on OK.

Figure 4.53: Adding a time offset

The country and its details will be added to the list of time offsets in the previousdialogue box. Click on OK.



For the Country field, a list of countries is given by default. But it is possible to typethree characters for the country code which is not proposed in the list.

The lists of default language and country codes can be customised to includeadditional languages or countries or restrict default lists to the most commonchoices.

These lists can be customised by changing the content of the codes.ini text file inthe DBS 2930 setup directory.

When language or country codes are defined in this file, the DBS 2930 uses theseinstead of the default lists regardless of the version (French or English) of theDBS 2930.

The order in which codes are declared sets the order in which they appear in thechoice lists.

The file format observes Windows .ini file syntax.

Example of a .ini file

[country_code]

FRA=France

[ISO_639_language_code]

est=Estonien

fre=Français

The [country_code] section contains the country codes. The name of each key is theISO 8859-1 three-character code for the country. Its value is the text to be displayedin the list of choices.

The [ISO_639_language_code] section contains the language codes. The name ofeach key is the ISO 639 three-character code for the language. Its value is the text tobe displayed in the list of choices.

Lines not observing the specified syntax are ignored.




The procedure for changing and deleting descriptors is similar to that explained forthe NIT.

4.5.3.4.2 - Changing descriptors

,,,, Procedure for changing a TOT descriptor

1. Select the descriptor to be changed in the Descriptors part of the dialogue box(Figure 4.52 page 225).

2. Click on Edit... and change the parameters in the right-hand List of time offsetspart of the dialogue box.

3. Click on OK.


4.5.3.4.3 - Deleting descriptors

,,,, Procedure for deleting a TOT descriptor

1. Select the descriptor to be deleted in the Descriptors part of the dialogue box(Figure 4.52 page 225).

2. Click on Remove.

3. Click on Yes to confirm your choice.


The TOT table saving and loading functions are identical to those for the NIT (seesection 4.5.3.3.4 - Saving/Loading a NIT page 220) except that the TOT >command is used instead of NIT >.

As for NITs, the application offers the additional possibility of saving the TOTs infile format (save on PC or another storage medium) as, for example, whenupgrading the software version, the saved memory is reset and the previousconfiguration is lost for the saved TOT. The TOT then requires reloading from theTechnical Configuration application.



4.5.3.5 - Saving/Loading a device configuration

The active configuration is stored by the equipment.

The application offers the additional possibility of saving all edited configurations(not necessarily activated) in file format (save on PC or another storage medium).

,,,, Procedure to save a configuration



3. Choose the Save device configuration... command.

A dialogue box is displayed to enter the parameters required for the saved file, i.ethe file name and a comment associated with the file.

Figure 4.54: Saving a configuration



NIT >

TOT >






Lock device...

Unlock device...



There is no point in giving a file extension as the software adds the same extension(.mcf) to all saved files.

The file will be saved in the directory specified in the dialogue box. The directorycan be changed by clicking on the Browse... button.

,,,, Procedure to load a configuration



3. Choose the Load device configuration... command.



NIT >

TOT >






Lock device...

Unlock device...



A dialogue box is displayed to choose the configuration to use.

Figure 4.55: Loading a device configuration

The dialogue box shows the configurations available in the current directory. TheBrowse... button can be used to change directories. Configurations are presented inlist form. For each configuration the following is displayed:

the name of the file saved, the comment made by the operator when the file was saved.

4.5.3.6 - Archived configurations

This menu is used to:

configure the device with configurations stored in the memory, save configurations, erase saved configurations.

Caution:

The operator is recommended to save all configurations on PC in addition to thosesaved on the DBE 4110. If software is installed subsequently, configurations on theDBE 4110 may be lost, in which case those saved on PC can be restored to thedevice using the Control & Command software.



,,,, Procedure for saving, recalling or clearing configurations



3. Choose the Archived configurations... command.

Figure 4.56: Archived configurations



NIT >

TOT >






Lock device...

Unlock device...



The Configuration area consists of the following fields:

Name Enter the name of the configuration. It is also possibleto select the number of the configuration directly.

Save Save a current configuration.

Recall Recall a saved configuration.

Clear Clear a saved configuration.

" " " " Concerning the factory-installed configurations

The encoder has three factory-installed configurations accessible by the Recallcommand and saved in memories A (SNG-LBR), B (SNG-HBR) and C(LBR+DATA), which cannot be cleared.

These configurations serve as a base from which users can easily develop their ownconfigurations.

Note: Not all encoder parameters are set in the factory installed configurations. Forexample, 50/60 Hz mode is not taken into account.

The following table gives the values of the parameters taken into account byfactory-set configurations SNG-LBR, SNG-HBR and LBR-DATA.



A (SNG-LBR) B (SNG-HBR) C (LBR+DATA)

SERVICE Service ID 100 100 100

PMT PID 257 257 257

PCR PID 100 100 100

Type Digital TV Service (1)



Name TV TV TV

Provider name None None None

Scrambling Clear mode Clear mode Clear mode

VIDEO Source 4:2:0 MP@ML 4:2:2@ML 4:2:0 MP@ML

PID 100 100 100

Bit Rate 7.6 Mbit/s 20 Mbit/s 9 Mbit/s

Coding No low delay No low delay No low delay

Input SDI SDI SDI

Resolution 720x576 720x576 720x576

GOP 12 12 12

IP frame 3 3 3

Aspect ratio 4/3 4/3 4/3

AUDIO1&2 Input Analog Analog Analog

PID audio 1 110 110 110

PID audio 2 111 111 111

Bit rate 256 kbit/s 384 kbit/s 256 kbit/s

Type Stereo Stereo Stereo

Coding MPEG1 Layer 2 MPEG1 Layer 2 MPEG1 Layer 2

DATA PID Not used Not used 103

Baud rate Not used Not used 9600

Stream type Not used Not used 0x80

TRANSMISSION Symbol rate 6.111 Ms/s 23.333 Ms/s 6.666 Ms/s

Modulation QPSK QPSK QPSK

Code rate 3/4 7/8 7/8

Roll Off Auto Auto Auto

Level -15 dBm -15 dBm -15 dBm

Output Off Air Off Air Off Air

Spectral inversion Off Off Off

Packet size 188 188 204

IF frequency 70 MHz 70 MHz 70 MHz

L-band 1140 MHz 1140 MHz 1140 MHz



A confirmation request is displayed when recalling an archived configuration.


The following dialogue box is then displayed.

Figure 4.58: Validation dialogue box



4.5.3.7 - Cancelling/Validating changes

These commands are used to cancel or confirm changes to a device configuration.

,,,, Procedure for cancelling changes



3. Choose the Cancel modifications... command.

The following dialogue box is displayed:

4. Click on OK.

After confirmation, the command is run and the display reflects the devices activeconfiguration.

Note: The button or the Edit/Cancel... command in the menu bar achieve thesame effect.



NIT >

TOT >






Lock device...

Unlock device...



,,,, Procedure for validating changes



3. Choose the Validate modifications... command. The following dialogue box isdisplayed.

4. Click on OK.

After confirmation, the command is run and the display reflects the devices activeconfiguration.

The lower right-hand edge of the main window now displays the words "Activeconfiguration" and the pencil icon next to the device has disappeared.

Note: The button or the Edit/Validate... command in the menu bar achieve thesame effect.



NIT >

TOT >






Lock device...

Unlock device...



4.5.3.8 - Device locking / unlocking

For details on this function, please refer to 4.1.6 - Device locking/unlocking page165.



4.5.4 - Generated Services

The Generated Services item located underneath the encoder groups together theservices generated locally.

Figure 4.59: Generated Services

The Create a new service... command allows the encoder to generate services suchas TV, radio, mosaic, VBI data, EMM (Entitlement Management Message) orNVOD (Near Video On Demand).

There are 4 types of components: video, audio, VBI and data.

The following table contains the restrictions for assigning components to services.The number of components is also limited by the component resources available tothe DBE 4110.

Note: The maximum number of audio components is imposed by the encoder model.

Service Componentsvideo audio VBI data

TV 1 1 or more 0 to 4 0 or moreRadio 0 1 or more 0 0 or more

VBI data 0 0 1 0 or more



4.5.4.1 - TV service

The procedure for creating a TV service using 4 components is as follows:

1. Select Generated Services under the device in the tree structure.


3. Choose the Create a new service... command.

A dialogue box will be displayed to enter the type of service.

Figure 4.60: Generate a new service

Given the number of parameters to enter, the box contains several panels insuccession accessible via the Next> and <Back buttons.

The Next> button is used to go to the next panel.

The <Back button cancels editing for the current panel and takes you back to theprevious panel.

The OK button confirms the set of parameters and proceeds with generating theservice.

Create a new service...

Manage ghost components

Not manage ghost components



4. In the dialogue box, select the service type TV.

5. Click on Next>.

A dialogue box is displayed to enter parameters relating to the service.

Figure 4.61: Service parameter entry

The Signalisation area contains the following fields:

Service id Service identifier.The generation of a local service can result in atransiting service being stopped. This is the case whenthe service ID required has already been allocated to atransiting service. When the service is stopped theAID_SRV_ID_CONFLICT alarm is raised.It is not possible to generate a service locally withservice_id 0xFFFF.

Type Select the service type from TV, Radio, Mosaic,Teletext, NVOD reference and NVOD item.

Name and Provider The decoder uses these character strings to display tothe user the name of the service and the serviceprovider.

Present and following (EIT)When the EIT present/following flag is set in the SDTtable, this field informs the decoders of the presence orabsence of information (Electronic programme guide)



about the "present" and "following" events of theservice. This private data information is provided byan external device and transported in theMPEG2/DVB stream via EITs (Event InformationTables).

Schedule events (EITs) Same comment as above but concerning "scheduled"events, i.e. those after the "following" event.

The Multiplex area contains the following fields:

Running status This field offers several broadcasting types. Thisparameter is used to insert (or not, as appropriate) theservice and its components in the outgoing TS andaffects the Running Status field in the SDT indicatingservice status.When the running status is off, the correspondingservice will not be output.

PID PMT PID in which the PMT describing the service will beinserted (a default figure is provided). Services mayuse PID PMTs specific to each one or a PID PMTcommon to all of them.

PID PCR PID in which the reference clock PCR is transmitted.The PID of the component carrying the PCR is calledService PID.

6. Enter the various parameters in the dialogue box.

7. Click on Next>.

A new dialogue box is displayed to select the components to be assigned to theservice.



Figure 4.62: Selection of TV service components

It is possible to select several components.

8. In the Available components box, select the required component(s) (checkboxes).

9. Click on OK to confirm the selection made in the three dialogue boxes.

The service created, and its components, are displayed in the main window.

Figure 4.63: Created service display



10. Confirm your choice by clicking on the button.

4.5.4.1.1 - Editing parameters of the video component

,,,, Procedure

1. Select the video component.

2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the component-specific commands.


The dialogue box displayed is made up of three panels plus an additionalAcquisition panel if the COMPIN board is used.

Edit parameters...

Remove component...

Edit additional PMT info...



General parameters panel

Figure 4.64: Entry of video component parameters (General parameters)

The Source and Profile parameters have the following values:

Source Choice between SDI, DPSN/PAL BDGHI if 50Hz frequency is set in theEdit advanced parameters panel, see section 4.5.3.1.1- General item page 192, DPSN/SECAM if 50Hz frequency is set in the Editadvanced parameters panel, NTSC M if 60Hz frequency is set in the Editadvanced parameters panel, PATTERN.



Note:The COMPIN composite video acquisition board givesaccess to more acquisition parameters than a DPSN board.When configuring a video component, the list of sources isextended and an additional Acquisition page is displayed.See page 252 for information on this page.

If COMPIN board is used, the following additionalsources are available: COMPIN/PAL BDGHI in 50 Hz(as shown in Figure 4.65), COMPIN/NTSC in 60 Hz (as shown in Figure 4.66).

Figure 4.65: COMPIN/PAL BDGHI option in 50Hz

Figure 4.66: COMPIN/NTSC option in 60Hz



Notes: 1. When the Pattern source is selected, the internal PLL isno longer locked onto the video input, but to a fixedinternal frequency.In these conditions, the SDI audio source transmitted withthe video signal could give rise to alarms due tosynchronisation problems, thereby creating disturbance inthe sound signal.2. There is no test to check whether the same PID is used asthe output PID of two transiting components. PIDinstructions are considered to be instruction opportunitiesand only apply when the components do indeed feature oninput. If however, the two components were to exist at thesame time, one of them would be stopped and an alarmraised.

Profile Choice between MP@ML and 422P@ML.

The Multiplex parameters area has the following fields:

PID Identification of the TS packets transporting the videocomponent.

PCR Choice between No PCR: the component does not carry the PCR, Service PCR: the component is referenced to carrythe service PCR. In this case, the PID of thiscomponent fills the PCR PID field in the Servicedialogue box (Figure 4.61 page 240), Contains a PCR: the component carries a PCRwithout being referenced to carry the Service PCR. Inthis case, each component of the service can carry thePCR. These facilities mean that in remultiplexingoperations, a TV service containing one video andseveral audios may be split into one TV service andseveral radio services each containing a single audioonly.

Off air This field is used to suspend transmission of thecomponent without erasing it from the configuration.



The Compression area has the following fields:

Rate value between 0.5 and 15 Mb/s if [email protected] between 0.5 and 50 Mb/s if 4:2:2 [email protected] operator can now set a video bitrate lower than theminimum bitrate indicated in the DBE 41xx encodertechnical specifications. However, in any case an inputof under 0.5 Mbit/s is rejected.When exiting the video parameter editing screen, awarning message requests the operator to confirmsettings. The message specifies the minimum bitraterecommended by NEXTREAM for informationpurposes (i.e. 2 Mbit/s).

Figure 4.67: Warning message

Mode The mode optimises video compression.In Film mode, encoding and motion prediction areforced to frame mode because there is no motionbetween the 2 interleaved fields making up the frame.In Video mode, encoding and motion prediction areforced to field mode.In Auto mode, the encoder itself sets the best mode(film or video) having analysed the two interleavedfields. Only auto mode is capable of correct processingof a 3:2 pull down film mode (60Hz).

Format Choice between Manual: format specified by the field Default value4:3 or 16:9, Automatic WSS: format assignment depends on theWSS (Wide Screen Signaling) information containedin the incident 4:2:2 video signal. In case of non-



reception of the WSS signal, the format is specified bythe field Default value 4:3 or 16:9.

Note: With an SDI source transporting WSS in digital form(DID/SDID), you must declare the digital WSS in one ofthe VBI components (see section 4.5.4.1.3 - Editingparameters of the VBI component page 264). In any othercase, it is all done automatically.

Automatic AFD: format assignment depends on theAFD (Automatic Format Description) informationcontained in the incident 4:2:2 video signal. In case ofnon-reception of the AFD signal, the format isspecified by the field Default value 4:3 or 16:9.

Note: The AFD, also known as ARD, was defined by the BBC. Itis the modified "video index" (line 11 and 324 in 50 Hz and14 and 277 in 60 Hz) which supplies, among other things,information on image format (4:3, 16:9). The AFD canonly be received in a video from the SDI input.The Aspect ratio default value is used until the AFD datahas been received. Once the AFD has been detected, theimage format is determined by the AFD data. Unlike WSS,when the AFD data disappears, the image format keeps theformat contained in the AFD (it does not revert to thedefault format).



Advanced parameters panel

Figure 4.68: Entry of video component parameters (Advanced parameters)


P picture period (M) and GOP size (N)

The P picture period (M) parameter, from 1 to 3 andalways less than the N parameter, defines therecurrence of non-bidirectional pictures (P pictures).

Note: In low delay mode, the P picture period (M)parameter is forced to 1.

The GOP size (N) parameter, from M value to 24,defines recurrence of Intra pictures (I pictures).Examples of GOP M/N with B referring tobidirectional predicted pictures:GOP M=3, N=12: IBBPBBPBBPBBIGOP M=1, N=4: IPPPI



Picture resolution This field allows the picture resolution to be reduced inthe event of a low video rate. The picture resolutiondepends on the picture rate:

In 50 Hz,352 pixels x 288 lines352 pixels x 576 lines480 pixels x 576 lines544 pixels x 576 lines704 pixels x 576 lines720 pixels x 576 lines

In 60 Hz,352 pixels x 240 lines352 pixels x 480 lines480 pixels x 480 lines544 pixels x 480 lines704 pixels x 480 lines720 pixels x 480 lines

Compression delay Normal, Low or Ultra low (flag in the TS packetheader).

Use closed GOP mode The first B pictures of a GOP (just after intra pictures)are predicted with "backward-only" mode in order toallow bitstream editing.

PES info Define the Priority (Normal or High), Copyright(With or Without) and Content (Original or Copy)(flag in the TS packet header) for PES information.



Optimal configurations:1. Normal mode

2. Low delay mode (for remote interviews)

3. Ultra low delay mode

MP@ML 422@ML

Max bit rate 15 Mb/s 50 Mb/s

Min recommended bit rate / Min

bitrate allowed

720 pixels: 2 Mb/s / 0.5Mb/s702 pixels: 2 Mb/s / 0.5Mb/s544 pixels: 1.5 Mb/s / 0.5Mb/s480 pixels: 1.5 Mb/s / 0.5Mb/s352 pixels: 1 Mb/s / 0.5Mb/sSIF: 1 Mb/s (regardless of GOP

structure) / 0.5Mb/s

4 Mb/s (regardless of GOP structure)

Optimal GOPstructure

bit rate<8 Mb/s: 12/3bit rate>8 Mb/s: 12/2

4Mb/s<bit rate<8Mb/s: 12/38Mb/s<bit rate<15Mb/s: 12/215Mb/s<bitrate<30Mb/s: 8/1bit rate>30Mb/s: 2/1

MP@ML 422@ML


Min recommended bit rate /

Min bitrate allowed

4 Mb/s / 0.5Mb/s 6 Mb/s / 0.5Mb/s

Optimal GOPstructure

12/1 6Mb/s<bitrate<15Mb/s: 12/115Mb/s<bitrate<30Mb/s: 8/1

bit rate>30Mb/s: 2/1

MP@ML 422@ML


Min recommended bit rate / Min bitrate allowed

6 Mb/s 0.5Mb/s 6 Mb/s 0.5Mb/s

Fixed GOPstructure

1/1



Notes:1. The low delay software option (N41SLODE), installed as standard, is required foraccess to Ultra Low Delay mode.2. When Ultra Low Delay mode is activated, sound and image synchronisation is notguaranteed with audio components from AMUSE boards. In addition, M and N parametersare forced to 1 (the video contains only I images).

Acquisition parameters panel

Figure 4.69: Entry of video component parameters (Acquisition parameters)

The Analog video conversion area has the following fields:

VTR mode Check the box if the composite signal comes from aVTR not featuring a TBC (Time Base Corrector) or ifit is very poor quality.Default value: Off.

External synchro Check the box to enable the internal frame



synchroniser.Default value: Off

The NTSC conversion area has the following fields:

Check the Standard pedestal box if the NTSC signalfeatures a pedestal as per ITU-R 470 standard.Default value: Standard pedestal.This parameter is only visible if the source isCOMPIN/NTSC.

VBI parameters panel

Figure 4.70: Entry of video component parameters (VBI parameters)

Use VITC/DVITC The VITC/DVITC information contains a time-code.After extraction from the video field blanking (digitalor analogue) the VITC/DVITC is transmitted in the



MPEG2 video component. The DVITC must becarried by one line only (between line 6 and line 22).

Notes: 1. The N41SVBIP (VBI Processing) option is required toobtain this function.2. VITC/DVITC in DID/SDID form cannot be processedby the encoder.

4. Enter the various parameters in the dialogue boxes and click on OK.



4.5.4.1.2 - Editing parameters of the audio component

,,,, Procedure

1. Select the audio component.



A dialogue box is displayed allowing parameters relating to the audio component tobe edited.

General audio panel

Figure 4.71: Entry of audio component (general parameters)

Edit parameters...

Remove component...




The Source area consists of the following fields:

Source and Group/Channel (the latter only if the SDI source is selected):The source of the signal to be processed depends on the audio component number, presence of the AMuSE board, presence of the ATADI board.

Note: It is possible to configure the audio components using the compressors of the AMUSE board to produce an audio test signal. To do this, select Pattern in the list of sources in the audio component parameter editing screen.

The audio sources are summarised in the following table:

Component Encoder nameBoard/Audiocompressor

Possible source Mandatory conditions

Audio 1 [SSEB/AUD1] SDI /Group x/Channel 1Analog 1PATTERNATADI/Balanced 1ATADI/Unbalanced 1

ATADI presentATADI present

Audio 2 [SSEB/AUD2] SDI /Group x/Channel 2Analog 2PATTERNATADI/Balanced 2ATADI/Unbalanced 2

ATADI presentATADI present

Audio 3 [AMU2/AUD1] SDI/Group u/Channel 1Balanced 1Unbalanced 1

AMUSE present in slot 2AMUSE present in slot 2AMUSE present in slot 2

Audio 4 [AMU2/AUD2] SDI/Group u/Channel 2Balanced 2Unbalanced 2


Audio 5 [AMU2/AUD3] SDI/Group v/Channel 1Balanced 3Unbalanced 3


Audio 6 [AMU2/AUD4] SDI/Group v/Channel 2Balanced 4Unbalanced 4




Note concerning the audio source names from the SDI input.An SDI signal can contain up to 16 mono audio channels. Two mono audios consti-tute an AES/EBU channel. AES/EBU channels are grouped in pairs and each pairforms a group. The reference of the AES/EBU channel is made up of the group number (1 to 4) andthe number of the AES/EBU channel in the pair (1 or 2).

Comments: 1. SSEB board:

The SSEB board includes 2 stereo audio compressors, thus enabling two stereo audios inthe output signal (stereo audios 1 and 2). The possible sources for the each stereo audio areas follows:

the SSEB board SDI input; the SSEB board analogue input.

When the SDI input is selected, a group number must be supplied. This number identifiesthe group to which the stereo audio belongs. When the source of the two stereo audios 1and 2 is SDI, SSEB board internal wiring requires both stereo audios to be taken from thesame group (one de-embedder for each pair of stereo audios).

Mono

Audio 1/1

Audio 3/1

Audio 3/2

Audio 4/1

Audio 4/2

Audio 2/1

Audio 2/2

Audio 1/2

Stereo

Group 1

Group 2

Group 3

Group 4

Groups



2. ATADI board (option N41HATADAK):

When this board is present, the list of possible sources for the audio 1 and audio 2components contains two additional options:

the balanced digital input; the unbalanced digital input.

When the audio 1 and 2 source is a digital input, ATADI board internal wiring requiresboth inputs to be of the same type (Balanced or Unbalanced).

3. AMuSE board (option N41HAMUBAK):

The AMuSE board is now dual-standard, i.e. MPEG-1 Layer II and Dolby AC-3. It iscapable of packetising up to four Dolby AC-3 sounds from external audio encoders, or upto four sounds in MPEG-1 Layer II standardIt is not possible to combine MPEG-1 Layer II encoding and Dolby AC-3 packetising withthe same AMuSE board. The four audio channels on the AMuSE board are configured ineither MPEG-1 Layer II or Dolby AC-3.

In both cases, for each audio, the source options are as follows:the AMuSE board SDI input;the AES balanced digital input;the AES unbalanced digital input.

When SDI input is selected, a group number must be supplied. This number identifies thegroup to which the audio component belongs.

Some restrictions apply:1. When the audio compressor 1 and 2 sources come from the SDI signal, internal wiringof the AMuSE board requires selection of the same group for the two sources. This rulealso applies to compressor 3 and 4 sources. The SDI source (with AC-3 audio) must besynchronous with the one sent to the video encoder (SSEB board).2. When the audio compressor sources are AES digital inputs, internal wiring of theAMuSE board requires all AES inputs to be of the same type (balanced or unbalanced).When either of these sources is used, the external Dolby encoder must be genlockedthrough the synchronisation output from the REF OUT connector on the AMuSE board.

4. PATTERN signal:

The audio test signal consists in the transmission of a 2100 Hz frequency signal at 0 dBFS(full scale level).Be careful when using the audio test signal, as it produces a very loud sound.

Note: In pre-compressed AC-3 mode, the AMuSE board does not generate an internal audio test signal.



The Multiplex area has the following fields:

PID Identification of the TS packets transporting the audiocomponent.

PCR Choice between No PCR: the component does not carry the PCR, Service PCR: the component is referenced to carrythe service PCR. In this case, the PID of thiscomponent fills the PCR PID field in the Servicedialogue box (Figure 4.61 page 240), Contains a PCR: the component carries a PCRwithout being referenced to carry the Service PCR. Inthis case, each component of the service can carry thePCR. These facilities mean that in remultiplexingoperations, a radio service containing several audiosmay be split into several radio services each containinga single audio only.



Standard MPEG1 Layer II or Dolby AC-3. The Dolby standardis only available when an audio component has beenselected from the AMuSE board.

Mode Stereo, Joint stereo, Mono or Dual channel.

Note concerning activation of Dual PID mode forMonophonic Audio Channels.1. In the main Technical Configuration window selector add a first audio component from a compressor on theSSEB board (SSEB/AUD1 or SSEB/AUD2);2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menucontaining the device specific commands;3. Choose the Edit parameters... command;4. Set the audio component mode to Mono left or Monoright;5. Add a new component (using Add components... in theshortcut menu);6. Select the same compressor. The components mode willautomatically be set to mono-left if the first is in mono-right and vice versa. The two components are transported



in TS packets with distinct PIDs.Any change made to the compression parameters (Source,VPS, Alignment level, Headroom, Additional delay("Advanced" window below) applies to both components.To change an audio mono-left or mono-right component toan audio stereo, joint-stereo or dual channel component,the other mono component must be deinstalled.

Rate Choice between 64kb/s, 96kb/s, 128kb/s, 192kb/s,256kb/s and 384kb/s according to the mode (MPEGstandard does not allow any Mode/Rate combination).

VPS automatic mode In MPEG Layer II compression mode, VPSinformation contained in the incident 4:2:2 videosignal can be used to control automatic selection of theaudio mode and the bitrate. When automatic VPSmode is validated, the input values in the Compressionmode fields are default values that are only applied inthe absence of VPS information.

Note: With an SDI source transporting VPS in digital form(DID/SDID), you must declare the digital VPS in one ofthe VBI components (see section 4.5.4.1.3 - Editingparameters of the VBI component page 264). In any othercase, it is all done automatically.

Alignment level and HeadroomFor analogue audio source only:The maximum input level is the analogue level in dBUwith input saturation. After conversion, a digital levelof 0 dBFS is produced. Two parameters are used to setthe maximum input level: alignment level andheadroom.Alignment is the level in dBU which corresponds to0VU. It can be set between 0 and 4 dBU in 1 dBUsteps.Headroom is the difference in dB between alignmentlevel and input saturation. It can be set between 8 and20 dB in 1 dB steps.Physically, the analogue audio input saturation levelcorresponds to alignment level + headroom in dBU.



For example, the alignment level is +4dBU and theheadroom 20dB, the 0 dBFS corresponds to +24 dBU.

Advanced audio panel

Figure 4.72: Entry of audio component (advanced parameters)

Additional delay This parameter is used to adjust the phase of the audiocomponent with respect to the video component.The additional delay is used to recover a correctlipsync when a non-standard decoder is used.The accuracy of the value in ms is not guaranteed.Do not use the additional delay to compensate badaudio/video synchronisation of the encoder servicesignal.Please reboot the DBE 4110 after changing theadditional delay.The additional delay should remain set to 0, whichcorresponds to a correct lipsync (tested with anMSU 4422 decoder).However, in certain conditions the TS bitrate used by



audio components from an AMUSE board can bereduced by adjusting the Additional Delay setting. TSpacketisation is optimised when this parameter is set to+350 ms (see table below).

This change is only possible when an MPEG 1 LayerII coded audio component is attached to a service notcontaining any video component (radio service forinstance). The Additional Delay parameter can then beset between 50ms and +350ms instead of -50ms/+50ms.The DBS 2930 performs the following checks:- when editing the parameters of an audio component,the value of the Additional Delay parameter ischecked;- when adding a component to a service, addition of avideo component is rejected if the service contains anaudio component from an AMuSE board with anAdditional Delay value of above 50ms.

Figure 4.73: Error message

IO bitrate (kbit/s)

TS bitrate (kbit/s)

SSEB audio AMUSE audio

Additional Delay < 50ms Additional Delay = 350ms

64 70 125 70

128 135 186 135

192 205 250 205



PES info Define the Copyright (With or Without) or Content(Original or Copy) (flag in the TS packet header) forPES information.

4. Enter the various parameters in the dialogue box.

5. Click on OK.



4.5.4.1.3 - Editing parameters of the VBI component

The encoders can extract certain VBI data from the incident video signal andtransmit them in one to four VBI components in DVB form with different PIDs.

Caution: It is forbidden to declare the same VBI line in several VBI componentTSs.

The VBI data transport syntax is compliant with the DVB standard set out in thereference document ETS 300472 "Specification for conveying ITU-R System BTeletext in Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB) bitstreams" extended by the TM1952proposal (October 21, 1997) and a proprietary protocol.

VBI inserter

The VBI module is capable of processing ancillary data from either the SDI or thePAL input. The following diagrams describe the different ways ancillary data can orcannot be processed:



Figure 4.74: Ancillary data processing

Diagram 1 shows a VBI inserter function. VBI information from the compo-site video signal is conveyed in the TS bitstream as described in DVB standard.The composite video signal must be externally synchronised with the SDIvideo source.

Diagrams 2 and 3 illustrate a common setup. Diagram 4 shows a configuration similar to diagram 1 but which is not

supported. Diagram 5 illustrates the fact that the DBE 4110 cannot simultaneously

process VBI information coming from both video inputs.

VBI

video

video + VBI

video + VBI

video

VBI

PAL

SDI

PAL

SDI

PAL

SDI

PAL

SDI

VBI

video + VBIPAL

SDI

1

2

3

4

5

Diagram

Diagram

Diagram

Diagram

Diagram



The VBI processor capabilities are given in a table in Chapter 1 Specifications page21.

Caution:Data cannot be encoded simultaneously according to 50Hz and 60Hz MPEG-2 standard.

Notes:1. Each CEEFAX B, VPS, WSS can be mapped into its individual PID (max. 4 PID) or allthe previous can be mapped together into the same PID.2. The same VBI line cannot be associated with different PIDs.

,,,, Procedure

1. Select the VBI component.



Edit parameters...

Remove component...




A dialogue box is displayed allowing parameters relating to the VBI component tobe entered.

Figure 4.75: Entry of VBI component parameters

The VBI source area consists of the following fields:

Source Choice between SDI source from SSEB or AMuSE board, Composite source from DPSN or COMPIN board.

Format The VBI data can be in Modulated form or in Digitalform. The Modulated Information or DigitalInformation fields concern all the lines of the VBIcomponent.Modulated indicates that the incoming ancillary dataare in the form of analogue signals sampled at13.5MHz (digitalised waveform VBI). This is the casewhen DPSN source is selected, COMPIN source is selected, SDI source is selected with an SDI signal suppliedby an upstream DBI 2000 AVA (Audio VideoAcquisition) device if the VBI processing moduleoperates in transparent mode.



Digital means that the ancillary data are in 4:2:2 fieldblanking in 10 bit word form with DID/SDIDidentifiers (compliant with the SMPTE 291Mspecification "Ancillary data packet and spaceformatting") and data flows are analysed. This is thecase when SDI source is selected with an SDI signalsupplied by an upstream DBI 2000 AVA (Audio VideoAcquisition) device if the VBI processing moduleoperates in DID/SDID mode.This function is unavailable when the analogue videoinput from the DPSN or COMPIN board is selected.

The Multiplex area consists of the following fields:

PID Identification of the TS packets transporting the VBIcomponent.


Edit the parameters and click on OK to confirm.

Note: The PCR cannot be carried by a VBI component.



The second VBI page is the following:

Figure 4.76: VBI Lines

The VBI lines area consists of the following fields:

Line types Choice between B Teletext, Ceefax B (Magazine), BSubtitles only, Information VPS, WSS andTransparent Line.

Lines to be transmitted Selection of frame blanking lines which contain thetransmitted VBI data.The first box concerns blanking lines in the first field,whereas the second box concerns blanking lines in thesecond field.

Operating procedure: first select the type (line types), thenclick on the lines that are to be transmitted.

4. Edit the parameters and click on OK to confirm.



Notes concerning BARCO data:1. When creating a VBI component for transmitting Monochrome BARCO data, thetransparent lines should not contain any other VBI data, otherwise the lines will not becoded and an alarm will be raised. There are no BARCO specific VBI components and MTTransparent should be selected as the VBI line type. 2. The Stream type of the MT Transparent VBI components should be 0x92 which corre-sponds to a BARCO proprietary value. The Stream type of the MT Transparent VBIcomponents (ISO or BARCO) can be selected using the Telnet application. Refer to thesection VBI stream type page 398.3. A Data broadcast id descriptor with a value of 0x0103 (enter this value as the Databroadcast id) should be added to the PMT at the VBI component level. Refer to the section:PMT descriptors page 283.

data broadcast id

0x0103

Leave emptyu



4.5.4.1.4 - Editing parameters of the data component

,,,, Procedure

1. Select the private data component.



A dialogue box is displayed allowing parameters relating to the private datacomponent to be entered. This dialogue box has two panels:

The first panel defines the general parameters of the private data component. Itis independent of the data-injection interface.

The second panel depends on the injection interface (Ethernet, Serial or TS).

First panel: General Parameters

Figure 4.77: Entry of private data component (general parameters/Ethernet interface)

Edit parameters...

Remove component...




Figure 4.78: Entry of private data component (general parameters/TS interface)

The Source area has the following field:

Source Identification of input interface type, Ethernet, SerialInput (if N41SD56K - Data Injection through RS 232option present) or TS Input (if N41STSIN - ASI TSInput option present).

The Multiplex format area has the following fields:

Output PID Identification of TS packets which transport thecomponent.

Note: For two distinct components, it is not tested thatthe outgoing PID are different. The PID are consideredin the incoming stream. If the two components exists,one of the components are stopped and an alarm israised.



Contains the PCR This field allows the program clock reference to beinserted in the TS packet headers transporting thecomponent.The PCR cannot be carried by a serial component.


The Bitrate area has the following fields:

Min. bitrate Min. bitrate is not used for the serial components. Forthe Ethernet interface, if the min. bitrate is exceeded,an alarm is raised.

Max. bitrate - This field is used for regulation in the case of anEthernet source.- For the serial interface, an alarm is generated andstops the component.

The Bitrate area has the following fields (for the TS interface):

Stop the component if its bitrate is upper than... Stopping instructions can be made on an incomingcomponent associated to a local service.

Raise an alarm if its bitrate is lower thanAn alarm is raised if the measured bitrate is lower thanthe instruction. If the field is empty, there will be noalarm.

The Signalisation area has the following field:

Stream type Identification of data type, conforming to MPEG2standard ISO 13818-1: Generic Coding of MovingPictures and Associated Audio: Systems.



Second panel: Parameters specific to each injection interface

1. For the serial interface

Figure 4.79: Entry of data component (Serial interface parameters)

The Parameters area has the following field:

Baud rate 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 and 38400.



2. For the Ethernet interface

Figure 4.80: Entry of data component (Ethernet interface parameters)

The Ethernet parameters area contains the following fields:

Channel id If the data is input via the Ethernet interface, each dataflow must be referenced by a unique channel numberin the encoder. This number is recalled on each input.

Protocol The proposed protocols are TBS, VIACCESS, UDPDVB Simulcrypt and TCP DVB Simulcrypt.



TBS protocol

The injection of data via the TCP/IP sockets uses a NEXTREAM control/commandproprietary protocol. For this protocol there are no specific parameters.

Figure 4.81: Ethernet interface, TBS protocol parameters



VIACCESS protocol

The injection of data via the TCP/IP sockets uses VIACCESS protocol. This mode is used for the broadcast of VIACCESS EMM. For this protocol there are no specific parameters.

Figure 4.82: Ethernet interface, VIACCESS protocol parameters



UDP DVB Simulcrypt protocol

Data is transmitted via UDP/IP according to a protocol defined by DVB.

Figure 4.83: Ethernet interface, UDP DVB Simulcrypt protocol parameters

For UDP DVB Simulcrypt, the following parameters must be defined:

Service_port Read only. This field gives the port number on whichthe device receives data to inject. This value can beedited from the devices advanced parameters (Datainjection page). If changed a device reboot isnecessary.

Data_port Number of the IP port on which the device is listening.

Client_id Identification of the source device. This value must beidentical to the one used on the injection side.

Data_id, Stream_id This identification is for distinguishing differentprivate components coming from the same injector.This value must be identical to the one used on thesource side.This field is called Data id in version 2 of the standardand Stream id in its first version.



TCP DVB Simulcrypt protocol

Figure 4.84: Ethernet interface, TCP DVB Simulcrypt protocol parameters



For the TCP DVB Simulcrypt protocol the parameters are:

Service port Read only. This field gives the port number on whichthe device receives data to inject. This value can beedited from the devices advanced parameters (Datainjection page). If changed a device reboot isnecessary.

Client id Identifier set on the DVB injector. In the case of anEMM channel, this identifier must take theSuperCAS_id parameter value supplied by the CAS(for SuperCAS_id definitions, see the standard ETSITS 103 197 DVB: Head-end implementation of DVBSimulCrypt).Default value: 0

Data id, Stream_id This field is called Data id in version 2 of the standardand Stream id in its first version. Default value: 0

3. For the TS interface

Figure 4.85: Entry of data component (TS input interface parameters)



The Component selection area is used for setting the injection parameters TS inputand Input PID.

Note: The incident PID is replaced by the one supplied by the Operating Station (seeFigure 4.77 page 271).

The Incoming signalling area is used for programming the behaviour of theencoder with regard to incoming signalling. If Dropped is selected, this means that the stream-type information and the descriptors contained in thePMT and the SDT input tables of the incoming TSstream are not kept. The Stream_type value of the firsttab ("General") is taken into account and the Editadditional PMT info... and Edit additional SDT info...commands are used for adding new descriptors. If Added to the local signalling is selected, thismeans that the stream-type information and thedescriptors contained in the PMT and the SDT inputtables are kept and added to the descriptors editedlocally. The Stream_type value of the first tab("General") is not used.

Note: If a transiting service component is linked to a generated service via the "local" option for descriptor insertion, the list of descriptors mentioned will be associated with the component in both PMTs generated by the multiplexer (the descriptors associated with the component in the PMT of the original service are forgotten). In other words, the multi-plexer only generates one context per component, and the transiting component is assi-gned the modifications made when it is used as a linked component.



The components thus redefined are displayed in the main window:

Figure 4.86: Main window

Click on the button to activate the new configuration (or alternatively, click onthe button to cancel the changes).



4.5.4.1.5 - PMT descriptors

The command for editing PMT (Programme Map Table) descriptors is used toassociate descriptors with services or components. Descriptors must be added incompliance with the DVB standard set out in the reference document ETS 300 468Specification for Service Information (SI) in Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB)systems.

PMT descriptors for a service

,,,, Procedure for editing PMT descriptors

1. Select the relevant service.

2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the service-specificcommands.

3. Choose the Edit additional PMT info... command.

Following this operation, a dialogue box will be displayed to add or removedescriptors and display or edit related parameters.

Figure 4.87: Editing PMT descriptors

Edit parameters...

Remove service...


Edit additional SDT info...

Add components...



An identifier under 128 can be entered in the descriptor adding screen to enableinsertion of any DVB or ISO descriptor which does not appear in the default list.

If the identifier entered does not match a supported descriptor the descriptor editingscreen is displayed for hexadecimal input of the descriptor.

Figure 4.88: Adding a private descriptor



,,,, Procedure for adding a descriptor

1. Click on Add...

A dialogue box is then displayed to select the required descriptor type.

Figure 4.89: Add a descriptor

The drop-down list in the Standard option offers a choice between severaldescriptor types: audio_stream, copyright, data_broadcast_id,data_stream_alignment, hierarchy, IBP, language, maximum_bitrate, mosaic,multiplex_buffer_utilization, private_data_indicator, private_data_specifier,registration, service_move, smoothing_buffer, STD, stream_identifier, subtitling,system_clock, target_background_grid, teletext, video_stream and video_window.

Note: It is possible to enter the three characters of the ISO 639 language codes for any languagethat is not available in the list.

2. Select the required descriptor.

3. Click on OK.

Clicking on OK updates the selected descriptor type in the original dialogue box.



4. Fill in the parameters then click on Add in the right-hand panel.

Figure 4.90: Display of descriptor type with related parameters(example: language descriptor)

5. Click on OK.




Data_broadcast_id descriptor

Figure 4.91: Data_broadcast_id descriptor

Data broadcast id This parameter identifies the data type transported bythe component. Its value is between 0 and 65535 or canbe selected from a list of preset values. The exhaustivelist is available in the DVB ETR 162 standard.The default value is Asynchronous data stream.The preset values available are:

Text Value

Data pipe 0x0001

Asynchronous data stream 0x0002

Synchronous data stream 0x0003

Synchronised data stream 0x0004

Multi protocol encapsulation 0x0005

Data Carousel 0x0006

Object Carousel 0x0007

DVB ATM streams 0x0008



ID selector bytes The definition and the value of this byte field dependon the selected data broadcast id.Default value: blankMaximum number of bytes: 253 bytes.

,,,, Procedure for deleting a descriptor

1. Select the descriptor to be removed (the descriptor is displayed with a bluebackground).

2. Click on Remove.

3. Confirm your choice ("Yes") in the dialogue box displayed.


,,,, Procedure for editing/displaying descriptor parameters

1. Select the descriptor to be edited/displayed (the descriptor is displayed with ablue background).

2. If required, edit the parameters in the Parameters area.

3. Click on OK.


PMT descriptors for a component

,,,, Procedure for editing PMT descriptors for a component

1. Select the relevant component.


3. Choose the Edit additional PMT info... command.

Edit parameters...

Remove component...




Following this command, a dialogue box appears identical to that in Figure 4.87page 283. However, the descriptors listed relate to the selected component.

It is possible to add and remove descriptors and edit their parameters as describedabove.

4.5.4.1.6 - SDT descriptors

The command for editing SDT (Service Description Table) descriptors is used toassociate descriptors with services: bouquet_name, country_availability,data_broadcast, linkage, ML_service_name, mosaic, NVOD_reference,private_data_specifier, stuffing, telephone and time_shifted_service. Descriptorsmust be added in compliance with the DVB standard set out in the referencedocument ETS 300 468 "Specification for Service Information (SI) in Digital VideoBroadcasting (DVB) systems".

The procedures are similar to those described for the PMT descriptors (see section4.5.4.1.5 - PMT descriptors page 283).



4.5.4.2 - Advanced Functions

4.5.4.2.1 - Shared components

A shared component is a component which is linked to two or more services in theSI/PSI tables.

Actually data of a shared component are not duplicated. The elementary stream isjust indicated by the signalling of different services.

A typical application of shared components is a live information service. Forinstance this service could be a news service that displays stock exchange quotes onthe TV set in real time. To be accessible from every service these data must bebroadcast into each TS of the network and referenced by each service. There arethree methods of implementation:

Figure 4.92: Principle of Shared Components

In the first solution (case a), the elementary stream is duplicated for each service inthe TS and is referenced as a private data component. The cost of this solution interms of bandwidth is very high.

The second way (case b) is to broadcast the elementary stream (ES) once in the TS.A private descriptor is used to reference the component. The decoder is able tointerpret that descriptor and tune to the component. This solution is acceptable butnot compatible with any remultiplexing operation since the component is notdescribed in the SI/PSI signalling.

Signalling

E. Stream

(a)

Srv 1 Srv 2 Srv 3

PID 100 PID 101 PID 102

PID 100

PID 101

PID 102

Signalling

E. Stream

(b)

Srv 1 Srv 2 Srv 3

PID 100

Signalling

E. Stream

(c)

Srv 1 Srv 2 Srv 3

PID 100 PID 100 PID 100

PID 100



The last solution (case c) is to use the share component feature. The data arebroadcast once and the component is described in SI/PSI signalling.

Any type of component can be shared.

,,,, Procedure

1. Select a service.

2. Select the Add components... command.

3. Consult the list of components.

4. Check the Show shared components box to display all the proposed resources(including those already used in another service).

5. Select the components to share in the list.

6. Click on OK.

Shared components are displayed like the other components in the main window.This means they can appear several times in the tree view.

Notes: 1. When parameters of a shared component are changed, all the items of the list referringto the shared component are updated. This means that each parameter of a sharedcomponent is identical regardless of the service except for the PCR. This parameter canhave different values according to the generated service that uses it. When a sharedcomponent is removed from a service, it is not removed from other services. Actually onlythe reference to this service is deleted. But when a shared component is only referenced byone service, it automatically becomes a non shared component. The remove commandworks exactly as it does for a non shared component.2. A shared component can only be scrambled locally if all the transmitted instances of thiscomponent belong to the same access group. Thus, when a component belongs to twoservices and scrambling is only required for one of the services, then the component istransmitted in clear.

4.5.4.2.2 - Ghost components

Ghost components are components broadcast by an encoder that are not referencedin SI or PSI tables. To recover a ghost component the receiver must know its PID.Since the PID is not present in SI/PSI signalling, the receiver and the transmittermust have a non standard mechanism to exchange the PID. This could be a private



data descriptor or a private table. Ghost components are used by some networks fortesting purposes or to generate non DVB/ISO streams.

Notes:1. Ghost components cannot automatically be transmitted at the remultiplexing stage evenif the multiplexer is set to pass all services. They must be explicitly indicated to getthrough the multiplexer.2. Ghost components cannot carry the PCR.3. If a component is a ghost component (non indicated in the outgoing stream), It does notbe associated to a service. If a component is declared "ghost component" issued of a SRV1service on the tributary, and the broadcast of the service SRV1 is authorised withoutstopping the component, the component is neither a ghost component because it describesin the PMT of the service SRV1.

To avoid confusion for users who do not need this feature, the Ghost componentitem is hidden by default. To show this item and gain access to the ghost componentfacilities, select the Manage ghost components command in the pop-up menu ofthe Generated Services item.

Figure 4.93: Add ghost components

,,,, Procedure

1. Select the Manage ghost components command in the menu attached to theGenerated Services item.

The icon appears in the tree structure. All the ghost components will begrouped under this entity.

2. Right mouse click to display the shortcut menu associated with the icon.

Add components...



3. Select the Add components... command.

4. Select components as for a standard service. Only free components can beselected. Ghost components cannot be shared.

Figure 4.94: Example of ghost component

4.5.4.2.3 - Inband command

This command is not useful for this encoder type.

4.5.5 - TS input

The TS input is found under Tributaries in the Technical Configurationapplication window.

The filtering functions on this input are the same as those offered on a multiplexer.They are summarised in the diagram on the next page.

The encoder TS input is only visible and can only be configured using the N41STSIN option.



BLANK PAGE



THOMSON DBE 4110


Drop anEMM service

EMM _PID :

Authorise anEMM service

Remove

EMM SERVICES

EMM serviceselection

EMMEdit filtering

Input PID:Change PID:Stop if bitrate >...Alarm if the bitrate <...

If (Stop all EMM)

(Pass all EMM)

47232437AK01

June 2003

TS Input filtering: menu tree

Input service_id:

Input PID:

Remove

STANDARD SERVICES

Input service_id:Change service_id:Change service_type:Change service_name:Stop if bitrate >...Alarm if the bitrate <...

Tributaryselection

used

Edit filtering

Pass/Stop allEMM

Stop all EMM

Pass all EMM

Authorise aservice to betransmitted

Drop a service

Serviceselection

Signalling typeAlarm if bitrate >...Alarm if the bitrate <...Reallocation authorisation

Pass/Stop allservices

unused

Stop all

Pass all

Stop all

Pass allAuthorize acomponent

Input PID:Change PID:Stop if bitrate >...Alarm if the bitrate <...

Drop a component

Edit Filtering

TRIBUTARY level

SERVICE level

COMPONENT level

all SERVICES

some SERVICES

all COMPONENTS

some COMPONENTS

Pass/Stop allcomponents

Authorise aservice to betransmitted

Input service_id:

Pass/Stop allECM

If

If (Stop all services)

If (Pass all services)

Add acomponent

296 Chapter 4

4.5 - Technical Configuration application

47232437AK01June 2003

THOMSON DBE 4110


BLANK PAGE


All types of filtering are possible:

First level filtering: first level filtering provides global action on the TS input.The Unused command stops the TS input whilst the Used command lets the TSinput stream through, applying the second, third and fourth level filtering conditionsdefined below.

Second level filtering: global filtering conditions may be defined (Stop all or Passall) on each of the following three entities: services, EMM data, access control data.For both the Services and EMM data entities, additional filters can be used toauthorise or drop individual services and EMM flows: Authorise a service to betransmitted or Drop a service and Authorise an EMM service or Drop an EMMservice commands.Other facilities are also offered, e.g.

checking incident TS stream identity (not implemented), selecting incident table processing mode, authorising automatic reallocation of component PIDs in the event ofconflict, monitoring the TS input bitrate. Monitoring allows the TS input to bestopped if bitrate is exceeded with notification to the operator.

Third level filtering: the identification parameters for authorised services(service_id, service_type, service_name) and authorised EMM flows (EMM_PID)can be redefined. In addition, service components are filtered at this level; filteringmay be global (Stop all or Pass all), or specific (Add a component or Drop acomponent).Other facilities are also proposed, e.g.

suspending or starting up transmission of a transit service, attaching locally generated components to a transit service, monitoring bitrates for incoming services. Monitoring allows incidentservices to be stopped if bitrate is exceeded with notification to the operator.

Fourth level filtering: all functions affecting components are grouped at thislevel, i.e.:

redefining a component PID. suspending or starting up transmission of a transit component, monitoring bitrates for incoming components. Monitoring allows incidentcomponents to be stopped if bitrate is exceeded with notification to theoperator.



4.5.5.1 - First level filtering: stopping/passing the TS input

,,,, Procedure to stop or pass the input TS

1. In the main window, select the tributary (TS);2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the tributary-specific

commands:

3. Choose the Used command (or Unused as the case may be).

Note: with the Used command, the data contained in the input TS is found in the outgoingmultiplex, subject to the second, third and fourth level filtering conditions defined below.


4.5.5.2 - Second level filtering: filtering conditions on the tributary, selecting services and EMM flows

4.5.5.2.1 - General filtering conditions on the tributary

The commands linked to tributary filtering conditions are only available if the TSinput is not stopped (the Used command must be ticked in the shortcut menuattached to the tributary).

,,,, Procedure for editing the general filtering conditions on the tributary

1. In the main window, select the tributary;

Unused TS inputUsed TS inputEdit filtering conditions...Authorise a service to be transmitted...(Drop a service...)Authorise an EMM service...(Drop an EMM service...)



2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the tributary-specificcommands:

3. Choose the Edit filtering conditions... command.

A dialogue box appears to input filtering conditions:

Figure 4.95: Editing of general filtering conditions for the tributary

Description of fields:

In the Transport stream checks area

Expected original network id and Expected TS idIdentity of the expected flow. If the inputflow does not match the expected identity,

Unused TS inputUsed TS inputEdit filtering conditions...Authorise a service to be transmitted...Drop a service...(Authorise an EMM service...)Drop an EMM service...



the encoder stops transmission.Each TS is identified by a specific TS_id inthe original network which is in turnidentified by an original_network_id.Not currently implemented.

Signalling Type The encoder load can be reduced byrequesting that only part of the incomingsignalling is managed. There are fivemodes available:No signalling: all signalling arriving on theinput is ignored. When this mode isenabled, all filtering instructions areignored as there is no analysis of signalling.Consequently, the filters placed on thisinput are not implemented. Data receivedon this input can only be used to define TScomponents.Default: the mode selected is the same asthat set for output (see editing of encoderadvanced parameters).ISO signalling: Only ISO tables areanalysed. DVB tables are ignored (SDT andEIT). If the multiplexer is configured togenerate a DVB output signal, the currentSDT is generated by default by the encoderby automatic creation of service and serviceprovider names.DVB restricted: ISO and DVB tables areanalysed except for EIT p/f and EIT s tableswhich are still filtered. The current SDTtable is produced from the data elementsavailable in the current incoming SDT.DVB signalling: ISO and DVB tables areanalysed. The SDT and EIT tables for eachservice are retransmitted if the filteringinstructions authorise transmission of theservice.



In the Default filtering modes area

Services Pass all: All incident TS services aretransmitted. However, unwanted servicescan be removed one by one from theoutgoing multiplex using the Drop aservice... command in the shortcut menuattached to the tributary (see section4.5.5.2.2 - Selection of services page 303).Stop all: All incident TS services arestopped. However, required services can beadded one by one to the outgoing multiplexusing the Authorise a service to betransmitted... command in the shortcutmenu attached to the tributary (see section4.5.5.2.2 - Selection of services page 303).

EMMs Pass all: All EMM flows from the incidentTS are transmitted. However, unwantedEMM flows can be removed one by onefrom the outgoing multiplex using the Dropan EMM service... command in theshortcut menu attached to the tributary (seesection 4.5.5.2.3 - Selection of EMM flowspage 306).Stop all: All incident TS EMM flows arestopped. However, required EMM flowscan be added one by one to the outgoingmultiplex using the Authorise an EMMservice... command in the shortcut menuattached to the tributary (see section4.5.5.2.3 - Selection of EMM flows page306).

ECMs Filtering is applied to all data linked toaccess control on the relevant TS input, i.e.: PIDs containing ECM channels; CA_descriptors placed in the servicePMTs.Pass all: all data linked to access control istransmitted.Stop all: all data linked to access control isstopped.



If the signal is scrambled, only the ECMsand their references in the signalling areremoved.

In the Case of PID conflict area

PID reallocation authorised If a transit component PID comes intoconflict with a locally generated servicePID, the encoder reallocates anotheravailable PID value.

PID reallocation not authorised If a transit component PID comes intoconflict with a locally generated servicePID, the encoder stops the component andraises an alarm to the operating terminal.

Notes: 1. Generated components have priority over transiting components. So, when generating acomponent whose PID enters into conflict with that of a transiting component, the latter isstopped (if reallocation is barred on the tributary) or its PID is reallocated.A transiting component linked to a locally generated service is not considered as a gene-rated component.2. It is advisable not to change the authorised/not authorised reallocation mode duringnormal operation and to always keep the same mode. In PID reallocation authorisedmode, the way in which PIDs are reallocated is directly linked to the order in which theyare detected in the incoming stream. It is therefore not surprising that reallocation candiffer between a redundant device and its back up device.3. The device accepts both services with a PCR carried by a specific PID and reallocationof the supported PID as required; however, one case of reallocation has not been solved.take the following example:

S1 (Vid = 200, Aud = 201, PCR = 400),S2 (Vid = 300, Aud = 301, PCR = 400),S3 (Vid = 400, Aud = 401, PCR = 400).

If no specific reallocation instruction is given, the output signal will be correct. But ifvideo 400 to video 500 reallocation is required, the output signal will be as follows:

S1 (Vid = 200, Aud = 201, PCR = 400),S2 (Vid = 300, Aud = 301, PCR = 400),S3 (Vid = 500, Aud = 401, PCR = 500).

In fact the result depends on the arrival and processing order of the PMTs. The problemdoes not arise if the PCR is not carried by a component.



In the Bitrate monitoring area

Drop this input if bitrate exceeds Maximum authorised bitrate threshold. Ifexceeded, the input is dropped.

and raise an alarm if bitrate is lower than:An alarm is raised if the bitrate is under thespecified value.

4. Enter the various parameters in the dialogue box.5. Click on the button to activate the new configuration (or alternatively, click

on the button to cancel the changes).

4.5.5.2.2 - Selection of services

Selection of transit services depends on the tributary filtering conditions defined inthe previous section.

If the (Default filtering modes) Services Pass all radio button is enabled, all inputTS services are found in the outgoing multiplex. However, unwanted services canbe removed one by one.

,,,, Procedure for removing services belonging to the input TS from the endmultiplex

1. In the main window, select the tributary;2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the tributary-specific

commands:

3. Choose the Drop a service... command.

A dialogue box is displayed allowing selection of the service to be removed.

Unused TS inputUsed TS inputEdit filtering conditions...Authorise a service to be transmitted...Drop a service...Authorise an EMM service...(Drop an EMM service...)



Figure 4.96: Selection of the service to be removed

4. Click on OK to confirm the selection made in the dialogue box.5. Click on the button to activate the new configuration (or alternatively, click


Figure 4.97: Main window - Removing a service

Conversely, if the (Default filtering modes) Services Stop all radio button isenabled, no input TS service is found in the outgoing multiplex. However, requiredservices may be added one by one.

,,,, Procedure for adding services belonging to the input TS to the outgoingmultiplex

1. In the main window, select the tributary;



2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the tributary-specificcommands:

3. Choose the Authorise a service to be transmitted... command.

A dialogue box is displayed allowing selection of the service to be added.

Figure 4.98: Selection of the service to be added

Note: In the Bitrate supervision area, when the case Stop the service if its bitrate upperthan is selected, the complete service is not stopped. Only some components are barreduntil the desired value of the bitrate reached.

4. Click on OK to confirm the selection made in the dialogue box.

Unused TS inputUsed TS inputEdit filtering conditions...Authorise a service to be transmitted...(Drop a service...)(Authorise an EMM service...)Drop an EMM service...




Figure 4.99: Main window - Adding a service

4.5.5.2.3 - Selection of EMM flows

As with services, selection of transit EMM flows depends on the tributary filteringconditions defined in section 4.5.5.2.1 - General filtering conditions on the tributarypage 298.

If the (Default filtering modes) EMMs Pass all radio button is enabled, all the inputTS EMM flows are found in the outgoing multiplex. However, unwanted EMMflows can be removed one by one.

,,,, Procedure for removing EMM flows belonging to the input TS from theoutgoing multiplex


commands:Unused TS inputUsed TS inputEdit filtering conditions...Authorise a service to be transmitted...(Drop a service...)(Authorise an EMM service...)Drop an EMM service...



3. Choose the Drop an EMM service... command.

A dialogue box is displayed allowing selection of the EMM service to be removed.

Figure 4.100: Selection of the EMM service to be removed



Figure 4.101: Main window - Removing an EMM service



Conversely, if the (Default filtering modes) EMMs Stop all radio button is enabled,no input TS EMM flow is found in the outgoing multiplex. However, requiredEMM flows can be added one by one.

,,,, Procedure for adding EMM flows belonging to the input TS to the outgoingmultiplex


commands:

3. Choose the Authorise an EMM service... command.

A dialogue box is displayed allowing selection of the EMM service to be added.

Figure 4.102: Selection of the EMM service to be added



Unused TS inputUsed TS inputEdit filtering conditions...Authorise a service to be transmitted...(Drop a service...)Authorise an EMM service...(Drop an EMM service...)



Figure 4.103: Main window - Adding an EMM service

4.5.5.3 - Third level filtering: filtering conditions on services

4.5.5.3.1 - General filtering conditions

These conditions only apply to services added individually using the Authorise aservice to be transmitted... command. They are used for:

suspending or restarting transmission of the service, global filtering of all service components (Stop all components or Pass allcomponents), changing service identification parameters (useful when forming a newmultiplex or when there is a service conflict during remultiplexing), checking that bitrate is not exceeded for the incident service, attaching local private data to an input TS service during theremultiplexing operation.

,,,, Procedure for editing general filtering conditions for a service

1. In the main window, select the relevant service;



2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the service-specificcommands:

3. Choose the Edit filtering parameters... command.

A dialogue box appears for input of filtering conditions.

Figure 4.104: Editing of general filtering conditions for a service


The Service selection area consists of the following fields:

Input service id Service identification,

Browse Command displaying the list of servicespresent in the input TS flow,

Edit filtering parameters...Remove this condition...(Authorise a component to be transmitted...)Drop a component...Add components...



On air / Off air / Stopped Command starting or suspendingtransmission of the service. Whentransmission is suspended (Off airselected), the Off air message appears inthe applications main window opposite theservice concerned.

The Default component filtering mode area consists of the following fields:

Pass all components All service components are transmitted.However, unwanted components can beremoved one by one from the outgoingmultiplex using the Drop a componentcommand in the shortcut menu attached tothe service (see section 4.5.5.3.2 -Individual filtering of components).

Stop all components All service components are stopped.However, required components can beadded one by one to the outgoing multiplexusing the Authorise a component to betransmitted command in the shortcut menuattached to the service (see section 4.5.5.3.2- Individual filtering of components).

The Modifications in output TS area consists of the following fields:

Change service id Number of the service in the outgoingmultiplex,

Change service type Type of service in the outgoing multiplex.

Change service name Name of the service in the outgoingmultiplex.

The Bitrate supervision area consists of the following fields:

Stop the service if its bitrate higher than Maximum authorised bitrate threshold.When this is exceeded, the service isstopped.






4.5.5.3.2 - Individual filtering of components

Selection of transit services depends on the service filtering conditions defined inthe previous section.

If the (Default component filtering mode) Pass all components radio button isenabled, all components of the service concerned are found in the outgoingmultiplex. However, unwanted components can be removed one by one.

,,,, Procedure for removing components belonging to an input TS service from theoutgoing multiplex

1. In the main window, select the relevant service;2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the service-specific

commands:

3. Choose the Drop a component... command.

A dialogue box is displayed allowing selection of the component to be removed.

Edit filtering parameters...Remove this condition...(Authorise a component to be transmitted...)Drop a component...Add components...



Figure 4.105: Selection of the component to be removed



Figure 4.106: Main window - Removing a component

Conversely, if the (Default component filtering mode) Stop all components radiobutton is enabled, no component of the service concerned is found in the outgoingmultiplex. However, required components can be added one by one.

,,,, Procedure for adding components belonging to the input TS to the outgoingmultiplex

1. In the main window, select the relevant service;




3. Choose the Authorise a component to be transmitted... command.

A dialogue box is displayed allowing selection of the component to be added.

Figure 4.107: Selection of the component to be added



Edit filtering parameters...Remove this condition...Authorise a component to be transmitted...(Drop a component...)Add components...



Figure 4.108: Main window - Adding a component



4.5.5.3.3 - Attaching components

It is possible to add local private data components to an input TS service during theremultiplexing operation. The following example shows how to configure theencoder for using attached components.

In the example, the encoder is to transmit all the services coming from tributary 1and add to the input TS service 500 a private data component, the PID of which is774.

Figure 4.109: Attached components

The attached components are private data that can be input by either the Ethernetlink or the serial link.

Note: The attached components cannot carry PCR.



,,,, Procedure

1. In the main window, select the relevant service.

Note: For tributaries with the default mode Pass all components, define a positive servicefilter in Authorise a service to be transmitted... to specify the service.

Figure 4.110: Positive service filter "Authorise a service..."



Figure 4.111: "Authorise a service..." dialogue box


3. Choose the Add components... command to attach the component.

Edit filtering parameters...Remove this condition...(Authorise a component to be transmitted...)(Drop a component...)Add components...



Figure 4.112: Add components... command

A dialogue box is displayed for you to select the component to be added.



Figure 4.113: Add components... dialogue box



Figure 4.114: Main window - attached component



Figure 4.115: Dialogue box, edition of parameters

Notes:1. The device does not know how to change the PID PMT in the PMT table of the transi-ting service. Thus, the Contains the PCR is greyed out.2. When a scrambled component is attached to a service (TS service or generated service),only the CA_descriptor corresponding to the component can be recovered. Componentscrambling must therefore be performed at component level and not service level.

4.5.5.3.4 - Removing a service

,,,, Procedure

1. In the main window, select the relevant service;2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the service-specific

commands:Edit filtering parameters...Remove this condition...(Authorise a component to be transmitted...)(Drop a component...)Add components...



3. Choose the Remove this condition... command.

A message appears to confirm removal of the service.


4. Click on OK or Cancel.5. Click on the button to activate the new configuration (or alternatively, click


4.5.5.4 - Fourth level filtering: filtering conditions on components

4.5.5.4.1 - General filtering conditions

These conditions only apply to components added individually to the outgoingmultiplex via the Authorise a component to be transmitted... command. They areused for:

changing component identification parameters (useful when forming anew multiplex or when there is a PID conflict during remultiplexing), suspending or restarting component transmission, checking that the bitrate is not exceeded for the incident component.

,,,, Procedure for editing general filtering conditions for a component

1. In the main window, select the component;2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the component-

specific commands:

3. Choose the Edit filtering parameters... command.

Edit filtering parameters...Remove this condition...



A dialogue box appears to input filtering conditions.

Figure 4.117: Editing of general filtering conditions for a component


In the Selection area

Input component PID Identification of the component,

Browse Command displaying the list ofcomponents present in the service,

Off air Command suspending transmission of thecomponent. When transmission issuspended (button enabled), the Off airmessage appears in the applications mainwindow opposite the componentconcerned.

In the Multiplexing area

Change PID PID in the outgoing multiplex.



In the Bitrate supervision area

Stop the component if its bitrate is higher than Maximum authorised bitrate threshold. If this is exceeded, the component is stopped.




4.5.5.4.2 - Removing a component

,,,, Procedure

1. In the main window, select the component;2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the component-

specific commands:.

3. Choose the Remove this condition... command.

A message appears to confirm removal of the component.


4. Click on OK or Cancel.

Edit filtering parametersRemove this condition...





326 Chapter 44.6 - Monitoring & Redundancy application

4.6 - MONITORING & REDUNDANCY APPLICATION

Foreword: Before starting the Monitoring & Redundancy application, it is recom-

mended to activate the Equipment Interface application (servex.exe), seenote in section 4.3 - page 170. It is recommended to activate this applicationbefore using any other operating software applications.

To modify parameters in the application, do not forget to lock the terminal forthe current application ( ). The commands are then accessible. The mainwindow background is white.

The language used for the interface can be selected. Screens are available inFrench or English (see section 4.1.3 - Setting the interface language page 160).


The Monitoring & Redundancy application allows supervision of the rate ofservices and their components and also transmits encoder alarms.

Maintenance commands are also available to reboot a device, display deviceinformation (general and internal information) and upgrade its configuration.

Note: The redundancy function, as suggested in the application name, does not concern the"Stand-Alone" environment.


Chapter 4 327 4.6 - Monitoring & Redundancy application

The following sections present the screen layout and the different functions offeredby the application.


Figure 4.119: Screen


section 4.6.3 Alarm supervision

section 4.6.4 Supervision of services and data flow

section 4.6.5 Save all/Load all commands

section 4.6.6 Maintenance commands

section 4.6.7 Audible warning of alarms


Alarms window Equipment window Services and data flow window Redundancy report window



Menu bar



Refresh Reserved.

View Alarms Display the Alarms window.

Automaticredundancy report

Not applicable in "Stand-Alone" context.

Services and data flow

Display the Services and data flow window.

Hierarchical view Display the Equipment window in Hierarchical view format.

Physical view Not applicable in "Stand-Alone" context.

Tool Lock all Lock the operating station to enable device parameters to be edited. See section 4.1.6 - Device locking/unlocking for details.

Unlock all Unlock the operating station. See 4.1.6 - Device locking/unlocking for details.

Save all... Save all configurations including any comment to file.

Load all... Restore a full configuration previously saved by Save all...

Options Sound... Enable/disable the terminal audible warning signal.

Window CascadeTile verticalTile horizontalArrange iconsClose all views

Choice of window arrangement.

Help About... Display software version.

Operating manual... Open on-line user manual. See 4.1.4 - On-line manuals page 162 for details.

Alarm help Open Alarm Help application.



Tool bar

Button Comment


Cancel the modifications and revert to the last saved configuration (i.e. the active configuration).

Display the Alarms window.

Display the Automatic redundancy report.

Display the Services and data flow window.

Display the Equipment window in Hierarchical view format.

Display the Equipment window in Sites or Racks view format. Not applicable in "Stand-Alone" context.

Lock the terminal for the current application. The commands are accessible. The main window background is white.Unlock the terminal for the current application. The commands are not acces-sible (only consultation is possible). The main window background is grey.



Main window

To show information concerning alarms and service and rate supervision, the mainwindow can display up to three separate windows at the same time: the Alarmswindow, the Equipment window and the Services and data flow window.

Figure 4.120: Tree structure of windows and views

" " " " Alarms window

This window is opened by clicking on the button or choosing the Alarmscommand in the drop-down View menu on the menu bar.

It features three pages displayed by clicking on the corresponding Active, Releasedand Masked tabs.

All the alarms sent by the encoder appear highlighted in yellow (plus one in blue).

Alarms window

Services and data flow window

Equipment window

Hierarchical view

Physical view

Sites view

Racks view

or

(not

Automatic redundancy report window

in

context)

applicable

"Stand-Alone



Figure 4.121: Alarms window

The alarm highlighted in blue corresponds to the alarm to which the shortcut menusapply. These menus are displayed with a right mouse click. A detailed explanationof the alarm supervision function and the three Alarm pages can be found in section4.6.3 - Alarm supervision page 334.

" " " " Equipment window

This window shows the encoder supervised by the operating station, with threemutually exclusive views.

a) Hierarchical view: This view may be accessed by clicking on the button orchoosing the Hierarchical view command in the drop-down View menu on themenu bar.

The icon symbolising the equipment is displayed in a different way depending onthe equipment alarm status:

grey icon: correct operation (no alarm). flashing red icon: alarm activated. non-flashing red icon: alarm released by Operator.

A menu is also associated with the device, providing the following commands:

the following maintenance commands: encoder reboot, consultation of deviceinformation (general and internal information) and configuration upgrade,

Major alarmMinor alarm

Encoder nameOrigin of fault



release of alarms or cancellation of release, lock or unlock the device (see section 4.1 - Ergonomic aspects for an explanationof this function).

Note: Apart from the device information command which is always available, thesecommands are only visible if the station is locked ( ).

Figure 4.122: Equipment - Hierarchical devices view

b) Sites view: This view may be accessed by clicking on the button or choosingthe Physical view command in the drop-down View menu on the menu bar. Thisview shows the various sites or rooms supervised by the Operating Station. It isonly used in a "System" environment and is not proposed in "Stand-alone" mode. Itis not described in this manual.

c) Racks view: This view may be accessed from the Sites view. It is only used in a"System" environment and is not proposed in "Stand-alone" mode. It is thereforenot described in more detail in this manual.



" " " " Services and data flow window

This window may be accessed by clicking on or choosing the Services and dataflow command in the drop-down View menu in the menu bar.

The window consists of two sub-windows. The first sub-window displays the inputservices and rates on TS input. The second sub-window displays the output servicesand bit rates supplied by the encoder. Component bitrates are measured everysecond in the device. The bitrates fed back to the operating station appear fixedwhereas in reality they fluctuate.

Figure 4.123: "Services and data flow" window

The tree view has three levels:

at level one, the encoder (in the "Input services..." subwindow) and theTransport Stream conveying the set of services (in the "Output services..."subwindow). It shows the maximum rate allowed depending on the outputfrequency of the encoder and the size of the TS packets (see section 4.5.3.1.2 -Output item page 194) as well as the current rate.

at level two, the services of the selected device with data flow information. Therepresentation of services gives the name of the service, service identifier andservice data flow.

at level three, the components of a service with data flow information. Therepresentation of components depends on their scrambling (the icon is greyedout if the component is scrambled). Information given for components includescomponent type (Video, Audio, etc.), PID (in decimal and hexadecimal) andcomponent data flow.



4.6.3 - Alarm supervision

4.6.3.1 - Alarms window

The Alarms window contains three pages:

active alarms (Active tab), alarms not treated by the operator,, released alarms (Released tab), alarms seen and treated by the operator, masked alarms (Masked tab), alarms seen but not treated by the operator.

Each tab text contains the number of alarms listed in each page in brackets.

When a device is selected in the hierarchical view, all alarms related to the device inthe Alarms window are coloured yellow except the first in the list which takes theselection colour.

" " " " Active page

This page displays the active alarms of all devices.

An active alarm is represented by:

an icon which specifies the alarm severity level (minor, major), the alarm type identifier, the device which triggered the alarm, the textual description of the alarm.

A shortcut menu is attached to this page for the selected alarm to trigger it inreleased or masked status.

Figure 4.124: Active alarms page



Description of shortcut commands associated with an active alarm

Release This command releases an alarm. The alarm is deletedfrom the list of active alarms and added to the list ofreleased alarms. When the alarm falls, it is removedfrom the list. When it next rises, it becomes activeagain.

Release all active alarms This command releases all active alarms. See theRelease command.

Mask This command masks the selected alarm for the deviceconcerned. The alarm is no longer used when assessingthe status of the device. The Event Log applicationhowever continues to manage the masked alarm (i.e.monitor its fall). When the command is run, the alarmis moved from the list of active alarms to the list ofmasked alarms.

Mask for all devices This command masks the selected alarm for alldevices. The alarm is no longer used when assessingthe status of the devices. The selected alarm isidentified by (AlarmId and AlarmIdExtension). Thealarms concerned are all deleted from the list of activealarms and added to the list of masked alarms.



" " " " Released page

This page lists the alarms released by the Operator.

A released alarm is an alarm present on a device which the Operator has seen anddealt with. As long as the alarm does not fall, it continues to be displayed on thispage.

Figure 4.125: Released alarms page

Description of shortcut commands associated with a released alarm

Reactivate This command reactivates a selected released alarm.The alarm is deleted from the list of released alarmsand added to the list of active alarms.

Reactivate all released alarmsThis command reactivates all released alarms.

Mask the selected alarm See Description of shortcut commands associated withan active alarm page 335.

Mask the selected alarm for all devicesSee Description of shortcut commands associated withan active alarm page 335.



" " " " Masked page

Masked alarms are represented by:

an icon which specifies the alarm severity level (minor, major); the alarm type identifier; the name of the device which triggered the alarm or All devices showing that the

alarm is masked for all devices which generate it; a complete description of the alarm.

A shortcut menu is attached to the page for the selected alarm.

Figure 4.126: Masked alarms page

Description of shortcut commands associated with a masked alarm

Unmask This command unmasks a selected alarm. This alarm isdeleted from the list of masked alarms.

Unmask all alarms This command unmasks all masked alarms in onecommand.



4.6.3.2 - Equipment window

The Equipment window can be used to release all alarms or reactivate all releasedalarms for a device in one mouse click.

,,,, Procedure to release all alarms for the device

1. Select the device in the Equipment window (Hierarchical view).


3. Choose the Release alarms command.

This has the following effects:

The audible warning on the operating station is silenced, All alarm signals from the device are saved in the alarms list, In the Equipment window, the icon representing the device in alarm condition

remains red, but does not flash.

,,,, Procedure to reactivate all alarms



(...)

Maintenance commands...

Release alarms

Activate any released alarm

Lock device

(...)

(...)


Release alarms


Lock device

(...)



3. Choose the Activate any released alarm command.

If the device is still faulty, the alarm signals are reactivated (audible alarmreactivation and flashing icon). If the device is no longer faulty, the alarmsdisappear from the alarms list.



4.6.4 - Supervision of services and data flow

,,,, Procedure to view the services and components at the encoder input (tributary)

1. Display the Services and data flow window.


Note: The Monitor stuffing bitrate..., Drop all same level items and Collapse all samelevel items commands are irrelevant for the DBE 4110 encoder.

3. Choose the View input services and data flow... command.

A dialogue box allowing the tributary (TS) to be selected is displayed.

Figure 4.127: Selection of the tributary to monitor

4. Select the TS and click on OK.

The services and components are displayed in the window (or in a secondsub-window if the first sub-window is already open for the output services andcomponents).

View input services and data flow...

View output services and data flow...

Monitor stuffing bitrate...

Drop all same level items

Collapse all same level items



Figure 4.128: Service and data flow (input only)

,,,, Procedure to view the services and components sent from the encoder

1. Display the Services and data flow window.


3. Choose the View output services and data flow... command.

View input services and data flow...

View output services and data flow...

Monitor stuffing bitrate...

Drop all same level items

Collapse all same level items



A dialogue box will be displayed for you to select the device from which the outputservices are sent.

Figure 4.129: Selection of the device for displaying output services

Click on OK and the services and data flow will be displayed in the main window(or in a second sub-window if the first sub-window is already open for the servicesand input components).

Figure 4.130: Service and data flow (output only)

Note: The list is cut if the length is upper than seven pages.That can happen if the servicename is too long or if the number of services is very important. It is true for the incomingservices.



.

Figure 4.131: Service and data flow (input and output)

4.6.5 - Save all/Load all commands

The Save all/load all commands allow to save a new configuration or recover aconfiguration. The Save all command is available in the Tool menu in the Technical configuration application.

Please refer to the note page 187.



4.6.6 - Maintenance commands

The maintenance commands currently available concern device reboots,consultation of device information (general and internal information) andconfiguration upgrades.

,,,, Procedure to reboot the device


2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specificcommands:

3. Choose the Maintenance commands... command.

Notes: 1. Maintenance commands are only available if the station is locked (with button orshortcut Lock device command).2. The following maintenance commands are reserved for use with a ChannelController: Upgrade all nominal devices configuration..., Save in PCMCIA card,Off-line status, Maintenance status, Force configuration... and Load allconfiguration for MCC... They are therefore not relevant to Stand-Alone mode.

(...)


Release alarms


Lock device

(...)

Information...

Internal information...

Reboot device

Upgrade configuration...

(...)

(...)



4. Choose the Reboot device command and confirm your choice in the dialogue boxdisplayed.

,,,, Procedure to get device information




4. Choose the Information... command. The dialogue box displayed contains threetabs for displaying general information about the device, information about boardsand information about options in turn.

(...)


Release alarms


Lock device

(...)

Information...


Reboot device


(...)

(...)



Figure 4.132: Device information (1/3)

Figure 4.133: Device information 2/3



Figure 4.134: Device information 3/3

,,,, Procedure to get internal device information



(...)


Release alarms


Lock device

(...)




4. Choose the Internal information... command.

The dialogue box displayed contains information on internal use of resources suchas the maximum number of sub-tables, the number of sub-tables used and thenumber of free sub-tables. The same information is displayed for sections, packets,ECM flows, etc.

Figure 4.135: Internal device information

,,,, Procedure to upgrade configuration

This command is used to format version 6.5 configuration files as version 7.0 files(current version). This operation is required to enable the next software upgrade(version "7.0" to "7.1") without interrupting programmes, since a version 7.1 deviceis capable of reading configurations edited in version 7.0 but not those edited withversion 6.5 (unless the upgrade operation described above has been performed).

Information...


Reboot device


(...)

(...)






4. Choose the Upgrade configuration... command. The following confirmationrequest will be displayed:


5. Confirm the operation.

(...)


Release alarms


Lock device

(...)

Information...


Reboot device


(...)

(...)



4.6.7 - Audible warning of alarms

An audible warning is given by the operating station as soon as an alarm signal issent by the device.

To deactivate the audible warning, it is necessary to:

remove the device fault, or release the alarm on the Operating Station, or disable the audible alarm using the Options/Sound command from the menu

bar in the Monitoring & Redundancy application.

Figure 4.137: Sound command in the menu bar


Chapter 4 351 4.7 - Download application

4.7 - DOWNLOAD APPLICATION


The Download application is used for firmware downloading allowing on-siteupdating of boards.

The following sections display the screen layout and the different functionsavailable with the application.


Figure 4.138: Download screen


section 4.7.3 Procedure

section 4.7.4 Additional commands

menu bartool bar main window


352 Chapter 44.7 - Download application

The functions are represented by the menu bar and the tool bar.

Menu bar.

Tool bar.


File Open... Browse package or firmware.

Exit... Exit the application.

Download Start... Download firmware on selected device.

Stop... Stop downloading.

Help About Display software version.

Button Comment


Browse package or firmware.

Add a device

Download firmware on selected device.

Stop downloading

THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01

MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003


4.7.3 - Procedure

The procedure to follow is described below and divided into three parts:

1. Before downloading:

Declare the device and establish a connection. Consult the "Information" window to find out the current version of the boards. Load the firmware to download. The files are provided on CD-ROM. Configure the download operation for the relevant device by selecting the

following tasks: downloading and/or memory bank toggling and/or devicereboot.

2. Downloading:

Start downloading.

3. After downloading:

Consult the downloading report.

4.7.3.1 - Before downloading

" Declare and connect device

First method: In the tool bar,

Click on the button. A dialogue box will be displayed for you to enter the IPaddress.

Figure 4.139: Add a device (1/2)

This function allows the encoder to be displayed in the main window as in Figure4.140.



Second method: In the shortcut menu (first tab Devices),


2. Choose the New device... command to add the encoder in the main window.

3. The new device is displayed in the main window, as in the following figure:

Figure 4.140: Add a device (2/2)

" Get information about the device

This function provides information about the devices identity, the boards itcontains and the installed options.



New device...

Reach/Refresh...

Information

Configure download...

Start download...Stop download...Reboot...Toggle boot space...

Log...

Delete...




3. Choose the Information... command. The dialogue box displayed contains threetabs for displaying general information about the device, information about boardsand information about options in turn.

Figure 4.141: Information (1/3)





" Select the firmware

1. Click on the second tab Firmware,

2. In the tool bar, click on the button.

3. Choose the package(s) or the firmware to download.

Note:1. A package consists of several firmware.2. The package(s) is (are) provided on CD-ROM.3. For SSEB and AMuSE boards, the firmware files are identified by the followingextensions:SSEB board .tes and .ssb,AMuSE board: .amb and .fp1.




The selected files are listed in the main window:

Figure 4.144: Firmware downloading

" " " " Configure download

This function is used to list the files to download and the actions to be carried outafter a download:

memory bank toggling. The SSEB software is stored in a flash memory bank.SSEB has two memory banks, which allows the user to download a newsoftware release via Ethernet while keeping the former one as a backup in caseof trouble.

device reboot. Some parameter changes need a device reboot to be taken intoaccount.

Note:If the firmware is not selected, the Download Configuration window does not display anytasks or download log.



3. Choose the Configure download... command.

4. Select the firmware to download and/or toggle by clicking on the line.

5. For device rebooting, click on the box at the bottom-left of Figure 4.145 page358.



.

Figure 4.145: Firmware downloading (tasks)

4.7.3.2 - Downloading

This function is used to start up downloading of the selected devices.



5. Choose the Start download... command in the shortcut menu (or the buttonon the toolbar or the Download/Start... command in the menu bar).

The following dialogue box is displayed for confirming the downloading operation.

Figure 4.146: Downloading confirmation




Downloading progress is shown as in the figure below:

Figure 4.147: Downloading in progress

4.7.3.3 - After downloading

" Log... command

This function allows the operator to consult the downloading report for the selecteddevice.



3. Choose the Log... command.

Figure 4.148: Download log



4.7.4 - Additional commands

" Delete... command

This function is used to remove the encoder in the Devices window.



3. Choose the Delete... command and click on OK to confirm in the dialogue boxdisplayed.

" Reach/Refresh... command

This function is used to establish the connection with the encoder after a reboot.This command is greyed out if the connection is established.



3. Choose the Reach/Refresh... command.

" Stop download... command

This function is used to stop encoder downloading.



3. Choose the Stop download... command.

or in the tool bar, click on the button.

" Toggle boot space... command

This function is used to toggle the active flash memory bank.






3. Choose the Toggle boot space... command.

Note: Before toggling, ensure that the content of the inactive flash memory bank is intact.This is not the case if downloading has been stopped (for any reason). The software in theinactive flash memory bank is then corrupt and should not be used.

" Reboot... command

This function is used to reboot the encoder.



3. Choose the Reboot... command.


362 Chapter 44.8 - Event Log application

4.8 - EVENT LOG APPLICATION

4.8.1 - Principles of the Event Log application

The purpose of this paragraph is to list all the functions of the Event Logapplication.

4.8.1.1 - Event

" " " " Event types

The event types displayed are as follows:

rising alarm; falling alarm; reboots; device connections; device disconnections; device configuration changes (activations); service switching (to replacing) by INBAND command; service switching (to regular) by INBAND command.

" " " " Paired events

Some events can be grouped into pairs.

Paired events are:

rising and falling alarm; service switching to replacing and regular by INBAND command; setup and release of connections with devices.

" " " " Parameters displayed

Each event is displayed with the following parameters:

a record number; an event identifier (event_id); a sub-identifier (event_extension); the name of the device which caused the event;



Chapter 4 363 4.8 - Event Log application

the text describing the event; the date and local time of event occurrence; the duration (this parameter is significant only for rising alarm events).

4.8.1.2 - View configuration functions

These functions facilitate event viewing by displaying just some of the informationaccording to operator-defined criteria.

" " " " Sorting

Sorting consists of changing the order in which events are displayed in the list. Twosort options are available:

sorting by record number; sorting by date and time.

" " " " Filtering

Filtering consists of defining events to be displayed on the screen. Those displayedsatisfy the following criteria:

they belong to event identifier lists; they come from given devices; they fall between two dates set by the Operator.

" " " " Masking

This function is used to mask the display of certain untimely events. These eventsare not deleted, they are simply no longer visible.

" " " " Searching

This function is used to move the cursor in the view of the current event to the eventwith which it is paired.

If the search fails (the paired event is not present or not visible on account of thefilter applied), an error message notifies the operator that the command has failed.

4.8.1.3 - Event exporting

It is now possible to export the list of events to a text file.

Any given event is represented over one line, each field of the event being delimitedby a tabulation.



Only events visible in the application are exported and not the entire base. Theresulting text file can then be used from a spreadsheet (e.g. Excel).

4.8.1.4 - Miscellaneous

In the Event Log application a text displayed in the status bar informs theoperator of event collection status.


" " " " Title bar

The title bar features the icon associated with the application as well as its name andthe name of the open event log file.

" " " " Menu bar


File Open... Open an event log which can be the current log or a log archived during the week.

Open current... Open the current event log.

Open previous... Open one of the seven event logs archived during the week.

Export... Export the open event log in text format.


View Refresh Refresh the view following receipt of new events.

Select events... Customise event display by applying masking filters to: display certain event types only, display certain alarms only, display events between two dates, display events relating to certain devices.

All events Display all events without changing the configuration of any filter defined with the View/Select events... command.

Selected events... Apply the filter defined with the View/Select events... command to the event view.




" " " " Tool bar

This is a quick-access command bar featuring icons associated with the mostfrequently used commands. Just click on the relevant icon to access the command.

" " " " Status bar

The status bar displays general information which the user may require at any time.

This bar features:

a description of the commands associated with menus; an indicator of the selection applied to the base:All events All the events of the file are displayed;Selected events Filtering criteria have been applied and not all events

are necessarily displayed. the number of the record selected and the total number of events displayed. When

Tools Report ... Display a statistical report on the open event log.

Calc durations... Calculate the duration between a rising alarm and a falling alarm or a device reboot.

Help About ... Display the software version.

Operating manual

Access to on-line versions of manuals installed on the Operating Station.

Button Comment

Quit the application. This button has the same effect as the File/Quit command.

Open an event log which can be the current log or a log archived during the week. This button has the same effect as the File/Open... command.

Indicator showing that new events have arrived in the database. Click on this icon to refresh the display. This button has the same effect as the Refresh... command.

Mask the display of certain events. This button has the same effect as the Select events... command.



filtering criteria are applied, the total is different from the number of eventscontained in the file;

event collection status: No event collection The Equipment Interface application has not been

run, the icon flashes to signal a problem. If the icon isnot visible the Equipment Interface application isopen but event collection is not enabled.;

Collecting events The Equipment Interface application is open andset to collect events.

a simulator mode indicator:<space> Simulator mode is disabled;Simulator mode Simulator mode is enabled.




" " " " Main window (table of events)

Figure 4.149: Table of events

The main view of the application displays the table of events contained in the eventlog being consulted.

The Operator can drag and drop column titles to change column display order.

The parameters displayed for each event are:

the record number; an icon according to event type; two numbers (id and ext) providing unique identification for the event; the name of the relevant device; the text describing the event; the date and time of occurrence (PCs local time);



the duration.

A shortcut menu attached to each event gives access to commands for finding thepaired event (in certain conditions see Find paired events page 374 and quicklyfiltering the selected event (see Quickly filter an event type page 375).

The command for finding a paired event is also available by double-clicking on anitem in the table.

4.8.3 - Commands

4.8.3.1 - Commands for opening an event log file

" " " " Opening an archived event log file

The File/Open command in the menu bar or the quick-access button replacesthe log displayed in the application by the one contained in an archived file. Thesecommands display standard dialogue box for selecting an event log file whoseextension must be .db.

Figure 4.150: Opening an archived event log file

" " " " Opening the current event log

The File/Open current command in the menu bar replaces the event log displayedin the application by the current event log.




If it fails to open a message informs the user accordingly and the file being viewedremains open.

If file reading occurs normally the applications title bar is updated and the events inthe current file appear in the main window.

This command is disabled when the open file is the current file.

" " " " Opening a file archived during the week

The File/Open previous command in the menu bar gives quick access to an eventlog archived during the week.

Backup files are attached to each day of the week:

Monday: Evtlog01.db file Tuesday: Evtlog02.db file Wednesday: Evtlog03.db file Thursday: Evtlog04.db file Friday: Evtlog05.db file Saturday: Evtlog06.db file Sunday: Evtlog07.db file

If it fails to open (the file is not in the current directory for instance) a messageinforms the user accordingly and the file being viewed remains open.

4.8.3.2 - Command for exporting in text format

The File/Export... command in the menu bar is only available if the base openedsuccessfully. It creates a text file containing the events displayed in the mainwindow.

File format:

<#>→<UTC date>→<type>→<level>→<id>→<ext>→<desc>→<device_name>→<text>→<duration>↵

The symbols → and ↵ replace the tabulation and 'carriage return' characters whichdo not appear on print-outs.

Note: Filtering criteria apply on file opening. Certain events may therefore not be displayed.

Important: To export the entire open event log all filtering must be cancelled beforehand.



<#> Record number of the event in the log file.

<UTC date> UTC date and time of the event. The date formatdepends on the settings in the Windows control panel.

<type> Event type: rising alarm, falling alarm, reboot,connection, disconnection, activation, service switch,service switch back, auto backup, si update.

<level> minor, major, not applicable.

<id> Event identifier.

<ext> Event sub-identifier. The <id>, <ext> pair providesunique identification for an event.

<desc> Number containing the parameters of the event. Itsmeaning depends on the event. It can contain a bitrate,a PID, a service_id, etc.

<device_name> Name of the device as displayed in the applicationwithout its type.

<text> Descriptive text displayed in the application in Englishor French depending on settings.

<duration> Duration associated with the event. This field is blankwhen insignificant. See section Calculation ofdurations page 378.

Example:

Figure 4.151: Example of a text file after log exporting

When this command is run, a dialogue box requests the Operator to enter the nameof the target file. The default file name is that of the open file with the extension .txt.Only the .txt extension is accepted.




If the name entered by the Operator is that of an existing file, confirmation isrequested before overwriting.

The directory selected by the Operator is stored and displayed as the default backupdirectory when the command is next run.

The export file format is suitable for use with a spreadsheet such as Excel.

Figure 4.152: Example of an exported file open in Excel

4.8.3.3 - Display commands

" " " " Refresh the view

When the open event log is the current event log, the View/Refresh command in themenu bar or the quick-access button updates the display following the receiptof new events.

If the events added to the log satisfy the display criteria they are displayed in themain window.

The selection remains unchanged after a refresh.

These commands are disabled when the open file is not the current file or as long asno new events have been received.

" " " " Selecting (filtering) displayed events

The View/Select events command in the menu bar and the quick-access button are only available if the base opened successfully.

These commands are used to customise event display in the main view by maskingcertain events.

The filtering criteria available enable the Operator to display just

certain event types; certain alarms; events between two dates;



events relating to certain devices.

The selected filtering criteria are stored when the Operator quits the application andreapply when the View/Selected events command is run (see page 374).

When the command is run the following dialogue box is displayed:

Figure 4.153: Filtering criteria

This box includes four sections:

Display the events; From alarm display; From devices; For the period.

Choice of event types to display




Only checkmarked events will be visible. By default, when the application is firstused the All events option is selected.

The types available depend on the events featured in the table, a list of events isdisplayed by default (see page 362).

If the open file contains unknown event types, these also appear in this list as acharacter string comprising the word Event followed by the event identifier.

It is possible to select or deselect all the items in the list using the Select all andDeselect all commands in the popup menu attached to the list.

Alarm management

When rising or falling alarms are selected filtering can be refined, by either maskingcertain alarms, or restricting the display to certain alarms.

The + and buttons opposite each list can be used to add or remove an alarm.

To add an alarm to a list select the + button or run the Add command in the popupmenu attached to the list and enter the alarms identifier and sub-identifier.

Figure 4.154: Add an alarm dialogue box

The Alarm id field must be between 1 and 191.

Devices

Filtering can be set to display just events relating to certain devices.

The list of devices is derived from the devices featured in the table. The devicenames are sorted in alphabetical order.

It is possible to select or deselect all the items in the list using the Select all andDeselect all commands in the popup menu attached to the list.

Filtering period

Each event is signed by a date and a time given by the device clock.

It is possible to introduce time as a filtering parameter to display only eventscollected between two specific dates.



There are two possible options:

Entire log: This is the default option. The date and time are notincluded in the selection criteria.

Only the events occurring between:The operator specifies the dates and times concernedby the selection.

" " " " Display all events

The View/All events command in the menu bar is only available if the base openedsuccessfully. It is used to display all the events without changing the configurationof any filter defined with the View/Select events command.

When this command is run, a checkmark appears next to the command title. Todelete this checkmark run the View/Selected events command (see section 4.2.8).

" " " " Display selected events

The View/Selected events command in the menu bar is only available if the baseopened successfully. It is used to apply the filter defined with the View/Selectevents... command to the event view.

When this command is run, a checkmark appears next to the command title. Todelete this checkmark run the View/All events command (see previous section).

To facilitate event list scanning, a command in the shortcut menu attached to themain window is available to go to the event paired with the selected event (see page362 for the list of events concerned by this command).

The title of this command depends on the item type selected:

for a rising (raising) alarm the associated command is Go to the clearing alarm. for a falling (clearing) alarm the associated command is Go to the raising alarm. for a service switch (to replacing) the associated command is Go to the service

switch back. for a service switch back (to regular) the associated command is Go to the service

switch. for a connection the associated command is Go to the disconnection. for a disconnection the associated command is Go to the connection.

Let us consider the following example:

"""" Find paired events




Figure 4.155: Example of a search for a paired event (1 of 2)

Select the raising 697 event and double-click or run the Go to the clearing alarmcommand.

If the clearing event is present the cursor automatically goes to this item.

Figure 4.156: Example of a search for a paired event (2 of 2)

In certain cases (e.g. if a filter is applied to raising alarms only) the search can failin which case an error message is displayed:

Figure 4.157: Message indicating search failure

The title of the error message varies according to the event type sought.

This function is used to quickly mask a type of event without using the filteringconfiguration screen. Just select the relevant event in the main view and run theMask this event command in the shortcut menu.

Figure 4.158: Quickly filtering an event type

"""" Quickly filter an event type



" " " " Sort display order

This command is used to sort events for display either by record number or by dateand time.

Sorting is activated by clicking directly on the column in the main view. One clicksorts in ascending order, a second click in descending order. The selection remainsunchanged after sorting.

4.8.3.4 - Calculation commands

" " " " Statistics

The Tools/Report command in the menu bar is only available if the base openedsuccessfully. It produces a report from the open event log.

When this command is run, a dialogue box is displayed to select the period foranalysis.

Figure 4.159: Edit events report

This command displays a summary table per device for the chosen period:

Notes: 1. All the events of the same type as the one selected disappear from the view. This concerns all devices and not just the selected device.2. Masking can be disabled by changing the configuration parameters available with the View/Select events... command.




Figure 4.160: Example of an events report

In the table the items are sorted in ascending alphabetical order by device name.

The table format is as follows:

<device> Device name

<alarms> Number of alarms on the device

<major> Number of major alarms on the device

<minor> Number of minor alarms on the device

<reboots> Number of device reboots

<disconnections> Number of device disconnections

<others> Total of other events related to the device

<total> Total of all events related to the device



The Tools/Calc durations... command in the menu bar is used to calculate theduration between a rising alarm and a falling alarm or the next device reboot. Giventhe time required for the calculation, this command is only available on backup filesand the Operator has to confirm command execution.

Once the calculation has been performed, the duration of each event is displayed inthe Duration column in the main window.

Durations are stored in the event log file. It is not necessary to recalculate durationeach time a file is opened.

"""" Calculation of durations

Note: When the calculation proves impossible (if the falling alarm is not saved in the same file) or duration is insignificant, the Duration column remains blank.



Chapter 4 379 4.9 - Alarm Help application

4.9 - ALARM HELP APPLICATION

4.9.1 - Scope

This application get electronic on-line help about alarms generated by superviseddevices.

The online help application is run like any other DBS 2930 "Stand-Alone"application or automatically via the Monitoring & Redundancy andEventLog applications. It can also be run from the command line.

4.9.2 - Features

4.9.2.1 - Extended description of alarms

For each alarm or event, the Alarm help application provides the followingextended information:

Alarm AID (number), e.g.: 5; Alarm AID (text), e.g.: AID_ALIM; Alarm extension id (number, if passed through the command line); Alarm severity (major/minor) + icon (red for major, orange for minor); Wording of the alarm (as in the Alarms Window of the Monitoring &

Redundancy application) (text in English or French); Category of the alarm. Matches X733 standard categories when possible

(Equipment, QoS, etc.); Autobackup current capability (Selectable / Impossible) indicates if this device is

allowed to trigger automatic redundancy switch-over for itself; Autobackup upstream capability (Selectable / Impossible) indicates if this device

is allowed to trigger automatic redundancy switch-over for the upstream device; Probable cause (text in English or French); X733 standard probable cause (only displayed when applicable); Action to take (text in English or French); Source device(s) (text); User comments (text).


380 Chapter 44.9 - Alarm Help application

4.9.2.2 - Print capability

A print command is used to print either the displayed alarm, all alarms or all thealarms regarding one device type. All fields are systematically printed except usercomments. The user can choose whether to print them or not. Printing (and display)is carried out according to the current language selected.

4.9.2.3 - Search engine

By entering an AID (and possibly AlarmIdExtension and/or AlarmIdDescription),the Alarm help application jumps to the alarm page identified by this AID. Ifseveral alarms have the same AID, the first of the list is displayed. It also searchesfor a word in general and displays all the alarms containing this word. The searchresult is displayed in the Summary window. Then, when selecting the alarm, theusual online help is displayed.

4.9.2.4 - Navigation tool

The Alarm help application is used to go to the previous, next, first or last alarmin the entire list of potential alarms (not the active alarm lists displayed in themaster application). Alarms are sorted by AID and then by cause.

4.9.2.5 - Synchronisation with the Monitoring & Redundancy and Event Log applications

From the Monitoring & Redundancy and Event Log applications, there is acommand that automatically runs the Alarm help application and displays theselected alarm. When the Alarm help application has already been run, no newinstance of this application is run, its display is just updated.

4.9.2.6 - Synchronisation with other applications

Other applications can use the Alarm help application by selecting the commandline with the alarm parameters: AlarmId, AlarmIdExtension, AlarmIdDescription.See Access via any application page 383.

4.9.2.7 - User defined comments

The Alarm help application enables the user to add comments for one alarm.These comments are saved on the disk and are still kept after a soft patch. If an




alarm has been deleted in a new patch, the corresponding user comment entry isalso deleted. A comment can be 4096 characters long and is completely modifiable(Cut/Copy/Paste) by an edit command. It can only store alphanumeric characters.

They are independent of language settings.

4.9.2.8 - French/English versions

The graphical user interface is available in either English or in French. It dependson language settings when the Alarm Help application is installed.

4.9.2.9 - Customisation of display

The following fields are optional and may be shown or hidden in the Alarm helpapplication window:

Wording; Autobackup current and Autobackup upstream; Action to take; User comment; Source device(s); Cause; X733 standard probable cause; Category.

4.9.2.10 - Summary of alarms

The summary displays all available alarms sorted by AID. AID name and alarmwording are also displayed to recover an alarm. While selecting an alarm in this list,the Alarm help application is automatically updated. See User Interface (mainwindow and commands) page 384

4.9.2.11 - Help / About

A help/about command displays the Alarm help application version and anumber identifying the table content.



4.9.3 - Access to the Alarm help application

4.9.3.1 - Access via the Monitoring &Redundancy application

The Alarm help application is accessible:

via the menu toolbar help command: This only runs the Alarm helpapplication (no alarm is selected).

Figure 4.161: Access from Monitoring &Redundancy

by selecting an alarm in the Alarms window in the Monitoring &Redundancy application and pressing the <F1> key.

by right-clicking on a shortcut menu attached to an alarm and selecting Displayhelp.

Figure 4.162: Contextual Display help... command attached to an alarm

4.9.3.2 - Access via the Event Log application

The Alarm help application is accessible:

via the menu toolbar help command; by selecting an alarm in the Alarms window and pressing the <F1> key; by right-clicking on a shortcut menu attached to an alarm or an event and

selecting Display help.




4.9.3.3 - Access via any application

Alarm help is an independent application (.exe) and can be accessed from thecommand line. Parameters are optional. Here are the use cases:

AlarmHelpAlarm help has been run and displays the first alarm.

AlarmHelp <AlarmId>displays the first alarm corresponding to the AlarmId.

AlarmHelp <AlarmId> <AlarmIdExtension> displays the first alarm corresponding to the AlarmId and AlarmIdExtension.

AlarmHelp <AlarmId> <AlarmIdExtension> <AlarmIdDescription>displays the first alarm corresponding to the AlarmId, AlarmIdExtension andAlarmIdDescription.

with <AlarmId>: integer, <AlarmIdExtension>: integer, <AlarmIdDescription>:integer.

Figure 4.163: Access via a command line(here, first alarm corresponding to the AlarmId = 1)

If no alarm is found or if the previous format is not respected, an error message boxis displayed: Alarm not found. Alarm Help will display the nearest one.



4.9.4 - User Interface (main window and commands)

A resizable pop-up window displays the previously selected alarm:

Figure 4.164: Alarm Help main window

In the menu bar, the database and DBS 2930 "Stand-Alone" versions are availablevia the Help/About database... and Help/About Alarm Help... commands in themenu bar.

All other commands can be found at the top of the window. Each buttoncorresponds to one command (Summary, First, Previous, Next, Last, Search,Print, Configure).

Summary Summary button displays the list of available alarms.




First Alarm help application displays the first alarm ofthe alarm list.

Previous Alarm help application displays the previous alarmof the current alarm list.

Next Alarm help application displays the next alarm ofthe current alarm list.

Last Alarm help application displays the last alarm of thecurrent alarm list.

Search... The Search button displays a dialogue box and the userhas to enter the AID or the AID and ALARMIdExtension and/or AlarmIdDescription of the alarmhe or she wants to find.If the alarm is not found, an error message box isdisplayed and the Alarm help application stilldisplays the previous alarm. It also searches for a wordamong the entire list of alarms and displays the searchresult in the summary window. The user has to selectthe alarm containing the word and the main window isupdated. When the summary is closed, the mainwindow displays the searched alarm.

Figure 4.165: Search dialogue box

Print Click on the Print button to display a dialogue box andselect the type of print job and whether the usercomments are to be printed or not (check box). A



preview button displays the print preview (withQuickReport 3.0.5).

Figure 4.166: Print dialogue box

Here are the types of available print options:(Print) Displayed alarm.Here is an example of a print job for the current alarm:

Figure 4.167: Example of a print job




(Print) Alarm regarding one device typeSelect All Alarms of one device in the dialogue box andthen select the type of device.Here is an extract from a print job for all alarmsregarding one device type (switcher):

(Print) All alarmsSelect All Alarms in the dialogue box. The format isthe same as for the displayed alarm.

Configure The Configure button opens a list of fields that may bedisplayed or not. By default, all fields are displayed.



Figure 4.168: Configure dialogue box

If the User comments box is selected, user commentsare displayed in the main window of the Alarm Helpapplication and can be edited via another dialogue boxaccessible by clicking on the User Commenthyperlink:

Figure 4.169: Comments editor




Comments are edited by directly typing the text in thedialogue box panel. They are saved once the userselects OK. If Cancel is selected, all modifications aredeleted and the user comments panel reverts to itsprevious state.Delete, Copy and Paste respectively delete the selectedtext, copy it to clipboard and paste it from theclipboard.


390 Chapter 44.10 - Commands available with the Telnet application

4.10 - COMMANDS AVAILABLE WITH THE TELNET APPLICATION

This section describes how to use the Telnet application. It also explains the role ofparameters available to the user.

The following parameters can be edited by the user:

Audio stream type, LTW offset, Superencoder source switching mode, VBI stream type, IP Communication. LDSChurch mode, ABSAT mode, Multichoice-D1 mode, Foxtel 6dB uplift, Closed caption type, Extended-data insertion (line 284).

4.10.1 - Using the Telnet application

This section describes how to access the Telnet application and edit the parameters.The definition of editable parameters is given in the following section.

Note: editing parameters other than those described can lead to major devicemalfunction.



Chapter 4 391 4.10 - Commands available with the Telnet application

1) On the PC connected to the device, run the Telnet command to open the applica-tion.

2) Select Remote System under the Connect command in the Telnet (None) window

3) In the Connect window, enter the device IP address and click on the Connectbutton to validate



Once the connection has been established with the device, the following window isdisplayed:

4) Do not enter a User name and press Enter on the keyboard. The followingwindow is displayed:

5) Enter setup after the Runtime@SSEB/r0: prompt

6) Do not enter a Password and press Enter on the keyboard




7) Enter edit after the SETUP prompt

8) The window displays several choices, select 8 operating mode



The first editable parameter is displayed.

The example above shows the Video bidir parameter which can be set to ON if thevalue 1 is entered or OFF if the value 0 is entered. The value in brackets indicatesthe current parameter value. If you press Enter on the keyboard without indicating avalue, the current value is kept and the next parameter displayed. The next param-eter is also displayed if you enter a new value. All the parameters are displayed andedited in the same way:




9) When all the parameters have been displayed, the window again displays severalchoices. Select 0 Exit to display the SETUP prompt:

10) Enter quit after the SETUP promptThe Save setup ? question is displayed. Enter y.The Are you sure ? question is displayed. Enter y.



The Setup has been saved message is displayed to confirm that changes have beensaved.

4.10.2 - IP Settings

The IP Address, IP Netmask and Default gateway parameters can be edited via theTelnet application. To do this:

1) follow the instructions in section 4.10.1 - Using the Telnet application up untilwindow 8). Select 2 : ethernet IP address

Note: the changes will be applied when the device is next booted up.




2) the IP parameters window is displayed:

3) enter the parameter values as indicated in steps 8), 9) and 10) of the section4.10.1 - Using the Telnet application.

4.10.3 - Parameter definitions

The parameter editing procedure is described in the previous section.

4.10.3.1 - Video bidir

Video bidir (ON:1 OFF:0) (x)?

This parameter applies to very specific applications and should not be edited.Default value = 0.

4.10.3.2 - Audio stream type

Audio stream type (MPEG1:3 MPEG2:4) (x)?

This parameter defines the Audio stream type value so that it corresponds to eitherMPEG1 (value3) or MPEG2 (value 4). Default value = 3.All Audio components generated by the encoder will have the same audio streamtype and no combination is possible.

Note: the changes will be applied when the device is next booted up.



4.10.3.3 - LTW_offset

Set LTW_offset flag when service PCR (Yes:1 No:2) (x)?

This parameter tells the encoder whether or not it should add the LTW offset valueto the video when the video is carrying the PCR. Default value = 1.

4.10.3.4 - SPE (SuperEncoder) switch source mode

SPE switch source mode (same as old board:1 same as new board:2) (x)?

This parameter is used to choose the SuperEncoder board switch mode:

if you have an old version of the board (version AG), mode 1 must be selected if you have a recent version of the board (versions AH, AJ or AK), mode 2

must be selected. However, if the video input signals are not synchronous theninterference caused by the switch appears on the picture. In this case mode 1can be used to reduce interference.

4.10.3.5 - VBI stream type

VBI stream_type with MT lines (ISO:1 BARCO:2) (x)?

This parameter is used to choose the stream type value used for Monochrome trans-parent VBI components. The (ISO) default value is the 0x06 standardised value.The other possible (BARCO) value is 0x92 which corresponds to a BARCO propri-etary value used for Monochrome transparent lines.

All Monochrome transparent lines generated by the encoder have either a 0x06 or0x92 stream type value and no combination is possible.

A descriptor must be added to the PMT. See Technical Configuration applicationsection Editing parameters of the VBI component page 264.

4.10.3.6 - LDSChurch mode

LDSChurch mode -ignored when SPE board is declared- (ON:1 OFF:2) (x) ?

This mode only concerns operation in 60Hz mode. When the mode is set to ON, theactive lines in fields 1 and 2 are moved up a line. The first active line is thereforeline 21 for field 1 and line 284 for field 2 (the first line being line 1). This mode isused to transmit the sub-titles as a useful part of the video signal.




On a DBE 4130 or 4150 Encoder featuring a SuperEncoder board, this parameter isnot acknowledged and the lines are not moved up. The SuperEncoder board isdetected when the device is turned on.

Checking the "closed caption" box in the DBS 2930 Operating station, videocomponent parameters VBI tab is unnecessary. If the box is checked, the sub-titleswill be transmitted in the video stream twice (as user data and in line 21).

Default value = 2

4.10.3.7 - ABSAT mode

ABSat mode (ON:1 OFF:2) (x) ?

This mode, designed for the DBE 4130 Encoder, is used to modify Video encodingso that it is compatible with Philips "G+2" series decoders. When ABsat mode hasbeen selected:

- the VBV delay value is calculated and sent for each picture,

- the default quantisation matrix is systematically included for each I-picture.

The DBE 4130 Encoder in ABSat mode remains DVB compliant.

Notes:- operation in ABSat mode is not guaranteed with decoders other than Philips"G+2" series decoders.- ABsat mode has been designed for the DBE 4130 Encoder. Operation in ABsatmode is not guaranteed for other DBE 41XX Encoders.- ABsat mode only operates in 50Hz mode.- the Helper Channel application, which is a specific function of the DBE 4120Encoder, does not operate in ABsat mode.

Default value = 2

4.10.3.8 - Multichoice-D1 mode

Multichoice-D1 mode (ON:1 OFF:2) (x) ?

This mode implements an MPEG-2 syntax specifically for the video component.

- Each PES contains a single GOP,

- The PES is formatted as follows:



- the DataAlignmentIndicator bit is set to 1 (PES payload begins on a video"Elementary Stream" header),

- the PES data length field uses 10 bytes instead of 11 for I and P-pictures (a0xFF stuffing byte has been deleted).

- There is no stuffing byte between pictures at "Elementary Stream" level (no 16-bitalignment),

- There is no stuffing "Elementary Stream" (minimum payload at TS level).

When the mode is set to OFF, each PES contains a picture, the DataAlignmentIndi-cator is set to 0, the PES data length field uses 11 bytes, there is a number of stuffing"Elementary Streams" (required to align the start of the PES with the start of the TSpacket) and there is no longer 16-bit alignment.

Default value = 2.

4.10.3.9 - Foxtel 6dB uplift

Foxtel 6dB uplift (ON:1 OFF:2) (x) ?

This mode adds +6dB of gain to audio samples encoded in MPEG-1 by the SSEBboard. The audio is doubled before peak limiting and encoding.

All SSEB board audio inputs are concerned:- SDI, - Analogue audio converted to digital.

All audio components encoded by the SSEB board are affected.

AES/EBU audio signals generated by the ATADI board are affected.

The 2.1kHz test signal, 0dB generated by the SSEB board is not affected.

Audio signals generated by the AMUSE board are not affected.

The uncompressed audio mode (DBE 4120) is not affected.

Note: you are advised not to use Foxtel mode and a 384Kbit/s bitrate at the sametime, as in this case audio quality is not guaranteed.

Default value = 2




4.10.3.10 - Closed Caption type

Closed Caption type -only with DBE4130- (DVB/ATSC:1 DVB/DSS:2) (x) ?

In 60Hz mode, the DBE 41XX can extract line 21 sub-title information (the firstline being line 1) from the video input signal (if the information is modulated andnot binary) and can insert it into the "Video Elementary stream" according to theATSC A/53 standard. This is done when the "Closed caption" box is checked in theTechnical Configuration application, video component advanced parameters, VBItab.

With a DBE 4130 Encoder, the sub-titles can be inserted into the "Video Elementarystream" according to two standards:

DVB/ATSC: 1 = "DVB / ATSC A/53" standard,

DVB/DSS: 2 = "DTV95MDB-04, DirectTV MPEG1 and MPEG2 video streamspecifications for IRDs, version 2.1" standard.

This parameter does not affect the MPEG-2 TS layer or the PSI and SI tables.

This function is only implemented on DBE 4130 Encoders. On other DBE 41XXEncoders, the parameter value is set to 1.

Default value = 1 (DVB/ATSC A/53)

4.10.3.11 - Extended-data insertion (line 284)

Extended-data insertion (line 284) -only with DBE4130- (ON:1 OFF:2) (x) ?

Line 21 of the second field (i.e. line 284) can contain information similar to sub-titleinformation known as "extended data services".This parameter can have two values:

2 = OFF

1 = ON, the "extended data services" data is extracted from the video input signal(only in modulated form) and inserted into the "Video Elementary stream" syntax inthe same way as the sub-titles.

This function is only implemented on DBE 4130 Encoders operating in 60Hz mode.On other DBE 41XX Encoders, the parameter value is set to 2 (OFF).

Default value = 2

Notes concerning Closed Caption type and Extended-data insertion (line 284)parameters:



- A minor alarm will be raised if the Extended-data insertion (line 284) parameter isset to 1 and no data is present in the input signal.

- The video component syntax defines "a data type identifier" which has the value0x09 for sub-titles and 0x0A for "extended data services" data.

- If the DBE 4130 Encoder must be switched to 50Hz mode, the Extended-datainsertion (line 284) parameter must be set to 2 (OFF) before the Encoder isswitched from 60Hz to 50Hz mode.

The follow table gives permitted combinations for the Closed Caption andExtended Data parameters:

Except for the restrictions given in the table above, any combination of the fiveABSat, LDS, Multichoice, Closed Caption, Extended Data parameters is permitted.

Operating station Encoder configuration Result

Closed CaptionON/OFF

Closed CaptionATSC/DSS

Extended DataON/OFF

0 0 0 No Closed Caption and no Extended Data

0 0 1 Do not use

0 1 0 No Closed Caption and no Extended Data

0 1 1 DSS Extended Data

0 0 0 ATSC Closed Caption

1 0 1 Do not use

1 1 0 DSS Closed Caption

1 1 1 DSS Closed Caption and DSS Extended Data




Chapter 5 - PC operation - Fast_DSNG software 403

Chapter 5PC operation - Fast_DSNG software

5.1 - Fast-DSNG .......................................................................................... 405

5.2 - Software presentation........................................................................ 407

5.3 - Interfaces ............................................................................................ 4105.3.1 - Encoder interface.......................................................................... 4105.3.2 - Modulator/up-converter interface.................................................. 4105.3.3 - Graphic interface .......................................................................... 410

5.4 - Functions ............................................................................................ 4115.4.1 - Modulator configuration ................................................................ 4115.4.2 - Encoder configuration................................................................... 4115.4.3 - Supervision ................................................................................... 411

5.5 - Operation ............................................................................................ 4135.5.1 - General principles......................................................................... 4135.5.2 - Setup panel................................................................................... 4145.5.3 - Transmission panel....................................................................... 416

5.5.3.1 - Transmission parameters ............................................................ 4175.5.3.2 - Parameters linked to encoder control and signal content ............ 419

5.5.4 - Alarms panel................................................................................. 4265.5.5 - Scrambling panel .......................................................................... 4275.5.6 - Information panel .......................................................................... 4295.5.7 - Preset panel.................................................................................. 4305.5.8 - Dynamic behaviour ....................................................................... 432

5.5.8.1 - No connection .............................................................................. 4325.5.8.2 - Setting up a connection ............................................................... 432

404 Chapter 5

BLANK PAGE


Chapter 5 405 5.1 - Fast-DSNG

5.1 - FAST-DSNG

A DSNG system is used to transmit pictures and sound between the site of an eventand a professional television (producer, television channel, etc.).

The signals are produced at the site of the event from a mobile system containingthe equipment required to produce video and audio signals and transmit them to asite for broadcast via a satellite link.

The size of the DSNG system can vary considerably, depending on the coveragedesired for the event and the mobility required. A DSNG system can just as easilybe a camera, encoder, satellite modulator/up-converter which can fit into one or twoflight cases, as several O.B. vans containing cameras, mixing desks, encoders,cables, etc.

" " " " Those involved in DSNG systems are:- satellite operators;- satellite antenna manufacturers;- satellite modem manufacturers;- manufacturers of power amplifiers and RF systems;- video encoder/decoder manufacturers;- audio encoder/decoder manufacturers;- supervision system manufacturers;- systems integrators.

" " " " Setting up DSNG communications

Setting up a satellite link requires that a procedure defined by the satellite operatorbe followed:

1. The satellite operator notifies the DSNG operator of the: - position of the satellite; - transmission power;- uplink frequency; - bandwidth;- downlink frequency after frequency translation by the satellite.

2. The DSNG operator contacts the reception station by telephone and begins aconnection procedure.

3. This operator directs the satellite antenna and transmits a low power, pure carrieron the uplink frequency. When communication occurs on frequency C-band, spec-tral inversion may be required.


406 Chapter 55.1 - Fast-DSNG

4. The reception station confirms reception of the signal.

5. From this moment onwards, the DSNG operator can no longer interrupt thesignal transmitted to the satellite because signal absence may be interpreted byautomatic frequency allocation systems as availability of the frequency and band-width.

6. The DSNG operator increases the power and sets the modulator to modulationmode.

7. If the operator has a decoder and his geographical position enables him to receivethe transmitted signal, he checks that the transmission is being sent correctly. In theevent of a problem, he may also check the signal at the modulator output by usingthe L-BAND output.


Chapter 5 407 5.2 - Software presentation

5.2 - SOFTWARE PRESENTATION

" " " " Purpose

This software is supplied as standard with DBE 4110 encoders.

The main purpose of this software is to facilitate input of the parameters requiredfor setting up a satellite link on the encoders and the modulator. Configuration usingthe graphic interface is very simple. The operator can display all the transmissionparameters together with the composition of the transmitted signal on six screens.Configuration changes are optimised by reducing operator actions.

The software operates on a PC (laptop) with standard performance, featuring: - Windows 95, 98 or NT operating system;- Ethernet 10BaseT interface;- 640x800 colour screen with 256 colours;- pointer device (mouse or other).

The application is only available in English.


408 Chapter 55.2 - Software presentation

" " " " Environment

Three configurations are supported in the software.

Configuration 1: one encoder only

Configuration 2: one encoder and one modulator. The modulator is controlled bythe encoder (called the main encoder) which must feature the N41SMODC option(NEWTEC modulator control) or the ISMB board.

Configuration 3: two encoders and one modulator. The modulator is controlled byone of the encoders (called the main encoder) which must feature the N41SMODCoption (NEWTEC modulator control) or the ISMB board. The output of the secondencoder is connected to the ASI input of the main encoder. The main encoder mustfeature the N41STSIN option (ASI TS input processing).

Pilot encoder

Modulator

upconverter

HPA(poser amplifier)

satellitedish

ASI

FI

RF

DecoderLBand

Second encoder

ASI


Chapter 5 409 5.2 - Software presentation

The other devices that can be used in a DSNG system (redundant encoders, deco-ders, power amplifiers, up-converter) are not controlled by this software, apart fromthe up-converter when it is incorporated into the modulator.


410 Chapter 55.3 - Interfaces

5.3 - INTERFACES

5.3.1 - Encoder interface

The encoders are controlled/monitored by an Ethernet 10BaseT interface in TCP/IPusing the NEXTREAM protocol.

Configuration 3 (with two encoders) requires a hub to allow the two encoders to becontrolled from the same PC.

5.3.2 - Modulator/up-converter interface

The modulator/up-converter is controlled/monitored via the main encoder whichmust feature the N41SMODC option (Ext. Modulator C&C) or the ISMB board.

5.3.3 - Graphic interface

The graphic interface is a standard Windows interface.


Chapter 5 411 5.4 - Functions

5.4 - FUNCTIONS

Fast_DSNG software is used to display and modify part of the configuration of themodulator and encoders.

5.4.1 - Modulator configuration

The parameters which can be modified are:

- output mode (off, pure carrier, on);- attenuation of the output signal;- symbol rate or bandwidth;- RF frequency;- convolution and FEC;- activation of spectral inversion.

5.4.2 - Encoder configuration

The main parameters that can be modified are:

- list of components inserted into the signal;- enabling/disabling of scrambling for all the components;- session word used for scrambling and parity;- bit rate of each component (the bit rate can be calculated automatically for videocomponents).

The DVB signalling information associated with the service and network is automa-tically set by the software.

5.4.3 - Supervision

The available supervision functions are:

- display of the active alarms list of the encoders;- level of each alarm;


412 Chapter 55.4 - Functions

- display of the serial numbers of the encoders;- display of the software and hardware options installed on each encoder.


Chapter 5 413 5.5 - Operation

5.5 - OPERATION

5.5.1 - General principles

The graphic interface of the DSNG application is a 6-panel dialogue box:

- Transmission;- Alarms;- Scrambling;- Information;- Preset;- Setup.

You move from one panel to another by clicking the tabs of the relevant panels orpressing the function keys F1, F2, F3, F4, F5 or F8 for panels 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6.

All parameters can be edited with the mouse. Just click on the small calculatorimage to the right of each parameter editing field:

Figure 5.1: Numeric keypad


414 Chapter 55.5 - Operation

5.5.2 - Setup panel

This panel is mainly used on initial application start-up.

It allows the software to be configured to indicate:- whether Control/Command communication of the equipment is enabled or disa-bled;- the system configuration (1, 2 or 3);- the parameters required for setting up the Control/Command links of the encoders,i.e. their IP address.

The parameters are saved to the hard disk and are read automatically each time thesoftware is started up. They are saved in a file of the Windows initialisation file(.ini) type.

Figure 5.2: Setup panel

The choice of configuration and IP addresses of the encoders is only possible whencommunication with the devices is stopped. To do this, press the button in thebottom left hand of the window.

Follow the instructions in the box on the right-hand side of the panel:

Enter the IP address of the first encoder,



Select other devices, modulator or a second encoder:- Check Controls a modulator box (if a modulator is present),- Check Uses an external signal in TS input box, to enable the TS input (the option

is present in the first encoder) to be connected to an external device not controlledby the Fast_DSNG application,

- Check Use and Control a second encoder box, to allow the control of a secondencoder. The TS input option must be present in the second encoder (check Usean external signal in TS input box), enter its IP address,

- Enter the name of the service in the Station name put in window, 6 characters plus-1 (or -2).

Caution! The encoder(s) and the PC must have different IP addresses. If two devices have the sameIP address, software behaviour may be unpredictable.

When the information has been entered, press Connect to DSNG system to start upControl/Command communication with devices.

When communication is enabled, the software attempts to set up communicationwith the encoder(s) in order to gather the configuration information displayed to theuser in the other panels.



5.5.3 - Transmission panel

The Transmission panel is the most frequently used panel.

It is displayed by default on starting up the application if the parameters required forstarting communications were found in the initialisation file.

Figure 5.3: Transmission panel

It is divided vertically into two areas: - transmission parameters are displayed on the left; - parameters linked to encoder control and signal content are displayed on the right.

Note: If a modulator is used, the Transmission page can be used to change the L-BandFrequency parameter.



5.5.3.1 - Transmission parameters

Transmission parameters are found in two areas. The upper area is used during theprocedure for setting up satellite communication. The lower area is used for confi-guring the modulator.

In the upper part, four buttons control the modulator output:

In Off position (key F9), the modulator does not transmit a signal. Theoperator can then set the modulation parameters (frequency, bandwidth, etc.) inthe lower area. The application does not send any configuration to encoder.

In Ready position (key F10), the modulator does not transmit, the parameterscan no longer be edited. The software sends the configuration to the encoders.

In any Pure carrier position (key F11), the modulator transmits a pure carrierwith the level displayed under the button. The parameters entered in the lowerarea can no longer be edited.

In Modulation position (key F12), the modulator transmits a modulated signalwith the level set to High. In this mode, level and modulation parameters canno longer be edited.

Note: If the system is disconnected, all the devices remain in the initial state.

The parameters displayed in the lower area can only be modified in the Off position(key F9). Access is unauthorised in the other positions and the cursor indicates thisby changing its form ( ).

The Symbol rate and Bandwidth parameters are interlinked by a formula thatinvolves the Convolution parameter. Each time the operator changes one of thesethree, the Bandwidth and/or Symbol rate parameters are recalculated immediately.Thus, if the operator enters the symbol rate, the application will immediately calcu-late the bandwidth for information purposes, or vice versa. The calculated valuewill be displayed in the process.

Note: If a bad format is chosen, the bandwidth cannot be calculated and the fieldremains blank. An error message is displayed.



The following formula is applied:

Bandwidth = Symbol rate * (1 + Roll off)where Roll off = 0.35 in QPSK convolution

Roll off = 0.26 in 8PSK or 16 QAM convolution



5.5.3.2 - Parameters linked to encoder control and signal content

In Figure 5.3, the right-hand area of the dialogue box is dedicated to encoder controland the content of the transmitted signal. The button in the Components areatitle is used to quickly modify the service-id parameter.

Figure 5.4: Service Id Editor

It displays two lists of available components (one list per encoder).

The content of the list depends on the software and hardware options installed oneach encoder.

Above each list, an alarm symbol appears in front of each encoder name. Its appea-rance depends on alarm status:

Green: no alarm, Orange or red flashing: alarms have occurred.

In the list, a check box in front of each item allows a component to be inserted intothe signal transmitted to the satellite. By clicking these boxes, the components areinserted into, or removed from, the signal one by one.

If the Video bitrate automatic adjustment in the Transmission panel is checked,each time a component is inserted into or removed from the signal, the applicationrecalculates the bit rate of the video components automatically to ensure optimumuse of the bandwidth. For systems with two encoders, the rate allocated to eachvideo component is always identical.

For advanced use, a button located under each list allows access to parameters ofthe component selected in the list.

This screen can be used to modify the PID, profile or other advanced parameters.The presentation of the parameters in these screens is identical to that of theDBS 2930.

To change video parameters, the procedure is:1. Select the component,



2. Click on the Edit Video parameters... button or double-click on the component,3. The screen for the parameters of a video component (General panel) appears:

Figure 5.5: Video parameters (general panel)

The video rate cannot be set by the user if it is calculated automatically for eachchange of transmitted components.



4. Click on the Advanced tab to edit the advanced parameters of a video component(Advanced panel):

Figure 5.6: Video parameters (advanced panel)



5. Click on the VBI tab to edit the VBI parameters of a video component (VBIpanel):

Figure 5.7: Video parameters (VBI panel)



6. Click on the Helper Channel tab for the encoder to use any helper channel infor-mation present or transmit the encoding decisions:

Figure 5.8: Video parameters (Helper Channel panel)

To change audio parameters, the procedure is:1. Select the component,2. Click on the Edit Audio parameters... button or double-click on the component,3. The screen for the parameters of an audio component (General panel) appears:



Figure 5.9: Audio parameters (general panel)



4. Click on the Advanced tab to edit the advanced parameters of an audio component(Advanced panel):

Figure 5.10: Audio parameters (advanced panel)



5.5.4 - Alarms panel

This window lists the current alarms on the devices. The list is refreshed approxi-mately every 5 seconds.

The number of alarms features in the tab to the right of the page name. This savesthe operator opening the Alarms page to find out the status of the device.

When an alarm rises on a device, the application flashes in the Windows task bar towarn the operator who does not work on the application.

Figure 5.11: Alarms panel

The Acknowledge button is used to acknowledge all the alarms in the list.

Acknowledge box is not checked: the LED is flashing in the Alarm panel or inthe tasks bar,

Acknowledge box is checked: the LED stops flashing.

At each modification in the Alarm list, the button is released.



5.5.5 - Scrambling panel

To use this panel, the appropriate scrambling option is required.

Figure 5.12: Scrambling panel

The operator can define a list of session words (SW) on the right of the panel andassociate each SW with a client name. This list is saved to the hard disk of the PCand recovered each time the application is started up. Session words are limited tosix bytes and parity is fixed (even).

Three buttons located under the list are used to add, remove or edit a session word.

To edit the session word or the service client name, select the corresponding ClientName and Session Word line in the right-hand area and click on Edit or double-click on the line.

To add the session word or the service client name, select the corresponding ClientName and Session Word line in the right-hand area then click on Add.



Figure 5.13: Session Word and Client Name

The left-hand area is used to enable or disable scrambling on each encoder andselect the session word. The session word is selected from the list using Pickselected SW from list.



5.5.6 - Information panel

This panel displays the read-only information on the software and hardware optionsof the encoders.

Figure 5.14: Information panel



5.5.7 - Preset panel

Figure 5.15: Preset panel

This panel is used to configure each encoder with the configurations saved in theencoder memory, save configurations and delete backup configurations.

Two types of memory are defined for DBE 4110 encoders:

the authorised read and write memories that can be programmed by the Operatorusing the Fast_DSNG software.

the authorised read-only memories that are programmed at the manufacturers.They contain the standard predefined configurations. The contents of thesememories cannot be changed by the Operator.

A list is displayed for each encoder in which each line represents a memoryidentified by a number or letter (1 to 8 for read and write memories; and A, B, andC for read-only memories). Each line also contains the name of the archivedconfiguration and the memory status (Empty, Read only or Used). No name isshown in the second column when a memory is empty.



Three buttons are also available to:

copy the current encoder configuration onto the selected memory (Save button); activate the configuration from the selected memory (Recall button); delete the content of the selected memory (Clear button).

Note: the value of the parameters recognised by the factory set configurations A, B and C are identical to those described in section 4.5.3.6 - Archived configurations.



5.5.8 - Dynamic behaviour

This section contains the software specification elements that are liable to change.

5.5.8.1 - No connection

On starting up the application, the software attempts to set up a control/commandlink with the main encoder then with the second encoder.

As long as all connections (one or two depending on the configuration) are not setup, the configuration parameters are not displayed.

As long as communications are not set up, the encoder parameters in the Transmis-sion, Alarms, Scrambling and Information panels are masked.

5.5.8.2 - Setting up a connection

As soon as all the connections are set up, the software displays the current configu-ration.

If the encoder does not know how manage the current configuration, it sends amessage and proposes another standard configuration.

For a configuration with two encoders, the following tests are carried out:- If the Main encoder does not feature the N41STSIN option, communications are

broken and a message is displayed;- If the Main encoder features the N41STSIN option, the TS input configuration is

forced to allow all the services through. When an external signal is used on the TS input, all the services pass through.

Once the tests have been carried out, the encoder configuration is displayed on thesoftware screens.

Subsequently, the alarms are regularly requested from the device and displayed inthe Alarms panel.



Chapter 6 - Troubleshooting 433

Chapter 6Troubleshooting

6.1 - Device connection problems ............................................................ 436

6.2 - Inspecting the power supply fuse .................................................... 437

6.3 - Miscellaneous problems.................................................................... 4386.3.1 - Fan life expectancy....................................................................... 4386.3.2 - Front panel LCD blank.................................................................. 4386.3.3 - Default analogue video input ........................................................ 4386.3.4 - Autotest problem........................................................................... 4386.3.5 - Recommendations when using the MSU 4440 decoder............... 439

434 Chapter 6

BLANK PAGE


Chapter 6 435

This chapter contains useful information concerning first level maintenance. It isintended to help solve problems related to connection and mains fuse inspection.


436 Chapter 66.1 - Device connection problems

6.1 - DEVICE CONNECTION PROBLEMS

Connection problems are often difficult to solve as causes are numerous and varied.A malfunction may be caused by the network being incorrectly set-up on the PC, awiring problem or damage to a non-responding device.

The aim of this section is to provide a procedure that can be followed to solve theseproblems in a minimum of time.

When the DBE 4110 is signalled as not responding, proceed as follows:

1. Check that the DBE 4110 is operational and that the front panel is working, bymoving around the menus.

2. Check that the IP address assigned to the device on the PC in the EquipmentInstallation application matches the one assigned to the device displayed onthe front panel in the Other/Tools/IP Address menu.

3. Check that the DBE 4110 responds to network prompts; use the Ping IPaddress command in an MS-DOS window. If the device responds, skip the nextparagraph.

4. Check the value of the subnet mask in the network set-up panel on the PC; thesubnet mask identifies the part identifying the subnet in the IP address; like anIP address it consists of 4 numbers separated by "."; if the device address is notin the subnet, the device will not be accessible.

5. Check the cables with the ohmmeter; Ethernet cables are quite fragile andconnector crimping may be faulty.


Chapter 6 437 6.2 - Inspecting the power supply fuse

6.2 - INSPECTING THE POWER SUPPLY FUSE

If the "POWER" LED on the front panel is off, check the following in the orderspecified:

1. Check that the ON/OFF switch is ON.

2. Check the mains power supply source.

3. Reset the mains switch to OFF and disconnect the power cord.

4. Open the fuse holder on the switch base.

5. Measure the fuse value with an ohmmeter.

- If a fuse is faulty, contact the NEXTREAM Customer Service.

A faulty fuse indicates that the product is damaged. You are therefore notadvised to simply change the fuse.

Please have the product inspected by a qualified member of NEXTREAMmaintenance staff.

- If the fuse is not faulty, another fuse in the power supply drawer may be faulty. Toinspect this fuse, the unit requires dismounting and hence comes under a highermaintenance level. The procedure is not described in this manual.

Fuse holder


438 Chapter 66.3 - Miscellaneous problems

6.3 - MISCELLANEOUS PROBLEMS

6.3.1 - Fan life expectancy

The DBE 4110 has built in fans with a life expectancy of roughly 7 years at 30°C (6years at 40°C). When your DBE 4110 reaches this age, fans will need to bereplaced; please, contact NEXTREAM After Sales Service.

6.3.2 - Front panel LCD blank

If the DBE 4110 is on and the front panel LCD is backlighted but does not show anyindication or shows only four rows of black blocks, check that the contrast isproperly set.

6.3.3 - Default analogue video input

In the case of a device fitted with a DPSN board, the choice analogue video inputPAL/SECAM (50Hz) or NTSC (60 Hz) should be available. If not, check that theDPSN board has been declared present ("Other/Tools/Option/Hardware").

6.3.4 - Autotest problem

When a device cannot exit the autotest, try to clear the memory. To do this, switchoff and set the rotary switch (on the RSMAINT board, if present, if not, on theSSEB board) to position 5. Switch on, wait 1 minute, switch off, return the rotaryswitch to position 0, and switch on.

However, all the configurations (the current one and those saved) will be lost.


Chapter 6 439 6.3 - Miscellaneous problems

6.3.5 - Recommendations when using the MSU 4440 decoder

Picture freeze:

A PCR component must be generated. If "PSI OFF" decoder mode is used, check that the PCR PID is correct

(generally the video component PID). The recommended value of the V_PTS offset is 400 (menu "CHANNEL

#1/IRD CONFIG/V_PTS=400"). This value is mandatory as specified in thedecoder user manual.

Picture chroma incorrect, colours not stable:

The 27 MHz clock generated by the decoder is jittering: its internal PLL is notlocked. Check that the PCR PID is correct (PID of another service present inthe input multiplex) or verify that the PCR is present.


440 Chapter 66.3 - Miscellaneous problems

BLANK PAGE



Chapter 7 - Customer Service 441

Chapter 7Customer Service

7.1 - EU Declaration of conformity............................................................ 443

7.2 - FCC Declaration of conformity ......................................................... 444

7.3 - Return your comments ...................................................................... 445

7.4 - NEXTREAM Customer Services........................................................ 446

442 Chapter 7

BLANK PAGE


Chapter 7 443 7.1 - EU Declaration of conformity

7.1 - EU DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY


444 Chapter 77.2 - FCC Declaration of conformity

7.2 - FCC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY


Chapter 7 445 7.3 - Return your comments

7.3 - RETURN YOUR COMMENTS

All comments help us to improve our publications.

Do not hesitate to contact us:

NEXTREAM FranceDépartement MarketingService Documentation

Rue du Clos-Courtel35 517 CESSON-SEVIGNE - FRANCE

or by e-mail: [email protected]

Please give the manual reference.

Reader name:Company:Address:

Phone:Fax:E-mail:


446 Chapter 77.4 - NEXTREAM Customer Services

7.4 - NEXTREAM CUSTOMER SERVICES

" " " " For all inquiries regarding the procedure for returning equipmentfor in-factory repairs and follow-up of repairs:

contact the Customer Logistics Service

by telephone: + 33 (0)1 34 20 71 82 by fax: + 33 (0)1 34 20 71 92 by e-mail: [email protected]

For all returns, please request an RMA (Return Material Authorisation) numberfrom the Customer Logistics Service. The shipment address (B or C) will beconfirmed and will depend on the product.

Equipment should be returned in its original box with its return authorisationform (see following page). If you no longer have the packaging, the faulty devicemust be protected against shocks during transportation. The Customer LogisticsService examines packaging on arrival and can refuse to carry out repairs if thepackaging has been visibly damaged during transportation and this has led tofurther damage in addition to the fault originally noted.

Unless specifically agreed, cost and risks for return shipment of equipment areborne by the customer. Following repairs, return shipment costs will be borne byNextream France.

The company may not be held liable for any delay resulting from failure toobserve the return procedure.

Address B (Brest) Address C (Cergy)Nextream France

Technopole Brest-Iroise295 avenue Alexis de Rochon

29280 PLOUZANEFRANCE

Nextream FranceService Logistique Clients

17 rue du Petit Albi95801 CERGY PONTOISE

FRANCE


Chapter 7 447 7.4 - NEXTREAM Customer Services

" " " " For technical inquiries:The technical support service will answer any technical inquiries from customersnot covered by a specific support agreement (SLA - Service Level Agreement):

by telephone: + 33 (0)1 34 20 71 72 (from 9am to 6pm, French time, Monday to Friday, excl. business holidays) Answerphone available at all other times.

by fax: + 33 (0)1 34 20 71 92 by e-mail: [email protected]

This period can be extended using an SLA.

" " " " To contact the Customer Services Department:For information on additional services or a support agreement to meet yourrequirements, please contact your usual sales representative or the CustomerServices Department:

by telephone: + 33 (0)1 34 20 71 72 by fax: + 33 (0)1 34 20 71 92 by e-mail: [email protected]

An offer of services will be made depending on your requirements in terms of:

Service Level Agreements: TOPAZ, RUBY, EMERALD and DIAMONDlevels;

In-factory and on-site training; Spares; Technical documentation; Software updates; Local support; Specific agreement.


448 Chapter 77.4 - NEXTREAM Customer Services

This page can be duplicated for the return. Cette page peut être copiée pour faciliter le retour.

Reference number for the RMA:Numéro d'autorisation de retour:obtained from the Customer Logistic Service + 33 (0)1 34 20 71 82à obtenir auprès du service logistique clients + 33 (0)1 34 20 71 [email protected]

Equipt:

Name: date:

Fault description in the device returned:Merci d'indiquer le défaut de l'équipement:

Ship to (Expédier à): Address B or(ou) Address C :

Important notices:Please clearly mark the return authorisation number on the packaging.Except for special agreement, cost and risks for return shipment of the device are borne by the Customer. Nextream France cannot be held responsible if return procedure is not followed.Remarques importantes :Merci de noter clairement le numéro d'autorisation de retour sur l'emballage.Le transport pour le retour des équipements est à la charge et aux risques du Client.Nextream France ne peut être tenue pour responsable de tout délai suite au non-respect de la procédure de retour.

RETURN AUTHORISATION FORMAUTORISATION DE RETOUR D'EQUIPEMENT

Adresse B (Brest) Adresse C (Cergy)Nextream France

Technopole Brest-Iroise295 Av Alexis de Rochon

29280 PLOUZANEFRANCE

Nextream FranceService Logistique Clients

17 rue du Petit Albi95801 Cergy Pontoise

FRANCE



Chapter 8 - Abbreviations and Acroynms 449

Chapter 8Abbreviations and Acroynms

Abbreviations and acronyms ................................................................... 451

450 Chapter 8

BLANK PAGE


Chapter 8 451 Abbreviations and acronyms

ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

AAL1: ATM Adaptation Layer 1AAL5: ATM Adaptation Layer 5AC: Alternating currentAC3: Dolby 5+1 Surround encodingA/D: Analogue to DigitalADC: Analogue to Digital ConverterAES/EBU: Audio Engineering Society / European Broadcasting UnionAMuSE: Audio Multi Standard EncoderAPI: Application Programming InterfaceASI: Asynchronous Serial InterfaceASIC: Application Specific Integrated CircuitATM: Asynchronous Transfer ModeAVA: Audio and Video AcquisitionBAT: Bouquet Association TableBCS: Broadcast Control SystemBIST: Built In Self TestBPSK: Binary Phase Shift KeyingB.W.: BandwidthCAC: Conditional Access ControlCAT: Control Access TableCATV: CAble TeleVisionCBR: Constant Bit RateCDV: Compressed Digital VideoCLP: Cell Loss PriorityCPCS: Common Point Convergence SublayerCPU: Central Processing UnitCRC: Cyclic Redundancy CheckCS: Convergence SublayerCW: Control WordDBE: Digital Broadcast EncoderdBFS: Full Scale decibelDC: Direct currentDDS: Direct Digital SynthesisDES: Data Encryption Standard


452 Chapter 8 Abbreviations and acronyms

DID: Data IdentifierDPSN: Décodeur Pal Secam Ntsc (Pal Secam Ntsc decoder)DSNG: Digital SNGDSP: Digital Signal ProcessorDSS: Digital Satellite SystemDVB: Digital Video BroacastingDVD: Digital Versatile DiscDVITC: Digital Vertical Interval Time CodeECM: Entitlement Control MessageEDH: Error Detection and HandlingEEC: European Economic CommunityEIT: Event Information TableEMC: Electromagnetic compatibilityEMM: Entitlement Management MessageEPG: Electronic Program GuideEPROM: Erasable Program Only MemoryETSI: European Telecommunications Standards InstituteFBI: Field Blanking IntervalFCP: Field Coding ParametersFDM: Frequency Domain MultiplexingFEC: Forward Error CorrectionFPGA: Field Programmable Gate ArrayGOP: Group Of PicturesGFC: Generic Flow ControlGND: GroundGPS: Global Positioning SystemHDTV: High Definition TeleVisionHEC: Header Error ControlIEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronic EngineersIF: Intermediate FrequencyIRD: Integrated Receiver DecoderISB: Intermediary Satellite BandwidthISO/IEC: International Standard Organisation / International Electrical Commis-sionISOG: International Satellite Operators GroupITU: International Telecommunications UnionJTAG: Joint Test Action Group



LBI: Line Blanking IntervalLCD: Liquid Crystal DisplayLED: Light Emitting DiodeLTW: Legal Time WindowLVDS: Low Voltage Differential SignallingMCPC: Multiple Channel Per CarrierMDT: Multiplex Diagnostic TableMMDS: Microwave Multipoint Distribution SystemMP@ML: Main Profile / Main LevelMPEG: Motion Picture Expert GroupMPTS: Multiple Program Transport StreamMSB: Most Significant BitMTBF: Mean Time Between FailuresMUX: multiplexerMXX: multiplexer ASIC / DVB / DSS scramblerNIT: Network Identification TableNTSC: National Television System Community OAM: Operation Administration And MaintenancePAL: Phase Alternative LinePAT: Program Association TablePC: Personal ComputerPCMCIA: Personal Computer Memory Card International AssociationPCR: Program Clock ReferencePDH: Pleisiochronous Digital HierarchyPES: Packetised Elementary StreamPID: Packet IdentifierPL: Physical LayerPLE: Physical Layer ElectricalPLL: Phase Locked LoopPLO: Physical Layer OpticalPMD: Physical Medium DependentPMT: Program Map TableP/N: Part numberPSI: Program Specific InformationPSK: Phase Shift KeyingPTI: Payload Type IndicatorPTS: Presentation Time Stamp



QAM: Quadrature Amplitude ModulationQCIF: Quarter Common Interchange FormatQPSK: Quaternary Phase Shift KeyingRAM: Random Access MemoryR.I.: Revision IndexRMS: Root Mean SquareRS: Reed SolomonSAM: Scrambling Authorization ModuleSAR: Segmentation And ReassemblySAV: Start of Active VideoSCPC: Single Channel Per CarrierSDH: Synchronous Digital HierarchySDI: Serial Digital InterfaceSDT: Service Description TableSECAM: Sequentiel à MémoireSFC: Sampling Frequency ConverterSI: Service InformationSID: Source IdentifierSIF: Source Input FormatSIS: Sound In SyncSMPTE: Society of Moving Picture and Television EngineersS/N.: Signal / Noise ratioSNG: Satellite News GatheringSNMP: System and Network Management ProtocolSPTS: Single Program Transport StreamSRAM: Static Random Access MemorySSEB: Single Service Encoder BoardTBC: Time Base CorrectorTBD: To be definedTC: Transmission ConvergenceTCP/IP: Transmission Control Protocol / Internet ProtocolTCXO: Temperature Compensated Crystal OscillatorTDT: Time and Date TableTE: 5.08 mmTOT: Time Offset TableTS: Transport StreamTSDT: Transport Stream Description Table



U: 44.54 mmUNI: User Network InterfaceUTC: Universal Time CodeUTP: Unshielded Twisted PairVBI: Vertical Blanking IntervalVBR: Variable Bit RateVBV: Video Buffering VerifierVCI: Virtual Channel IdentifierVCR: Video Cassette RecorderVITC: Vertical Interval Time CodeVPI: Virtual Path IdentifierVPS: Video Programming SystemWSS: Wide Screen Signalling



BLANK PAGE


Documents

Nextream - 4110-20